JIS L 1096 - 2010 Fabric and Knitted Fabric Testing Method

> Go to site top > Go to the list of this category
L 1096： 2010
table of contents
page
preface 1
1 Scope of application 1
Reference standards
Two Two
Terms and definitions

Three Three
Exam type
Four Four
Test condition
Five Four
5.1 Testing location Four
5.2 Absolute dry mass Four
5.3 Official moisture content Four
5.4 Temperature and humidity Four
6 Collection and preparation of samples and test pieces Five
7 How to round numbers Five
8 Test method Five
8.1 Organization Five
8.2 Size Five
8.3 Mass per unit area 6
8.4 thickness 7
8.5 Bulky 7
8.6 density 7
8.7 Yarn shrinkage 8
8.8 Stitch length and cover factor 9
8.9 Composition of used yarn Ten
8.10 Moisture and moisture content 12
8.11 Apparent specific gravity and pore volume ratio 12
8.12 Cloth bend 13
8.13 Dregs and neps 14
8.14 Tensile strength and elongation Fifteen
8.15 Elongation modulus at constant elongation 18
8.16 Stretchability of stretch fabrics and knits 19
8.17 Tear strength 26
8.18 Burst strength 30
8.19 Wear strength and friction discoloration 32
8.20 Compression rate and compression modulus 41
8.21 Softness 41
8.22 Bending resilience 46
(1)
L 1096： 2010 Table of Contents

page
8.23 Sliding resistance 50
8.24 Wrinkles after washing 56
8.25 Drying 60
8.26 Breathable 61
8.27 Insulation 62
8.28 Lightfastness 63
8.29 Weatherability 63
8.30 Glue 63
8.31 Resin qualification and resin amount 63
8.32 Fats and oils 63
8.33 Solvent extractables 63
8.34 Washing weight loss 63
8.35 Training 64
8.36 Free formaldehyde amount 64
8.37 Extract pH 64
8.38 Barium activity number 64
8.39 Dimensional change 65
9 Test report 72
Annex A (normative) Textile products-Woven fabrics-Structural analysis-Organizational charts

And display method of weave 76
Annex B (normative) Textile products-Fabrics-Measurement of width and length 82
Annex BA (Reference) How to place cloth for temperature and humidity control / conditioning, relaxation treatment
86 and measurement
Annex C (normative) Textile products-Textiles-Measurement of unit length and mass per unit area 87
Annex D (normative) Textile products-Textiles-Structure-Analytical methods-Warp yarns per unit area of fabric
Measurement of the weight of weft and weft 92
Annex E (normative) Textile products-Measurement of thickness of fabrics and textile products 95
Annex EA (normative) Selection of test site and presser foot size and applied pressure 98
Annex EB (Reference) References 99
Annex F (normative) Textile products-Textiles-Structure-Analytical methods-Measurement of the number of yarns

100 per unit length
Annex FA (normative) Method of using taper type and parallel type densimeter 104
Annex G (normative) Textile products-Woven fabrics-Structures-Analytical methods-Measurement of shrinkage

107of yarns in fabrics
Annex GA (normative) Initial load 110
Annex H (normative) Textile products-Woven fabrics-Structures-Analytical methods-Measurement of apparent111

fineness of yarns removed from fab
Annex I (normative) Textile products-Woven fabrics-Structures-Analytical methods-Measurement of yarn twists115from fabrics
118
Annex J (normative) Textile products-Tensile properties of fabric-Measurement of tensile strength and elongation-Strip method
Annex J1 (Reference) Recommended sampling procedure 125
Annex J2 (Reference) Specimen cut-off locations from test samples 126
Annex J3 (Reference) References 127
128
Annex K (normative) Textile products-Tensile properties of fabrics-Measurement of tensile strength by grab method
(2)
L 1096 ：
L 1096：
2010 Table
2010of Contents
page
Annex KA (normative) Recommended procedure for sampling 133
Annex KB (Reference) Specimen cut-off locations from test samples 134
Annex KC (Reference) Grab arrangement for grab test 135
Annex KD (Reference) References 136
Annex L (normative) Textile products-Tear properties of fabric-Ballistic pendulum method (Elmendorf)

Measurement of tear strength 137
Annex LA (Reference) Adjustment and certification of test equipment 142

Annex LB (Reference) Recommended sampling procedure 143
Annex LC (Reference) Examples of patterns for cutting test pieces from test samples 144
Annex LD (Reference) References 145
Annex M (normative) Textile products-Burst characteristics of fabric-Measurement of burst strength and burst 146
expansion (hydraulic method)
Annex MA (Reference) Selection of test area 150
Annex N (normative) Textile products-Methods for evaluating the appearance smoothness of fabric after washing
151
Annex NA (Reference) Accuracy and accuracy 155
Annex O (normative) Textile products-Measurement of air permeability of fabrics 156
Annex OA (normative) Advice on calibration of test equipment and performance of tests 159
Annex OB (normative) Desirable sampling method 160
Annex P (normative) Textile products- Determination of pH of aqueous extract 161
Annex PA (Reference) Preparation of standard buffer 164
Annex JA (Reference) Comparison table between JIS and corresponding international standards 165
(3)
L 1096： 2010 Table of Contents
Preface
This standard is based on the Textile Evaluation Institute of Japan based on the provisions of Article 12, Paragraph 1 as applied mutatis mutand
The Technical Council (JTETC) and the Japan Standards Association (JSA) revised the Japanese Industrial Standards using the
The Japanese Industrial Standards Committee revised the Japanese Industrial Standards after the deliberations of the Japanese Industrial Standa
You.
As a result, JIS L 1096 : 1999 was revised and replaced with this standard, and JIS L 1018 : 1999 was abolished.
Has been replaced by this standard.
This standard is a copyrighted work protected by the Copyright Act.
A part of this standard shall be applied to patent rights, patent applications after publication, utility model rights or utility model registration applic
Call attention to potential conflicts. The Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry and the Japan Industrial Standards Commission have
Liability for patent applications after the publication of an application, utility model rights and utility model registration applications after the publicat
There is no end.
(Four)
Japanese Industrial Standard JIS

L 1096： 2010
Fabric testing method for woven and knitted fabrics

Testing methods for woven and knitted fabrics
preface
This standard includes ISO 3071 , which was issued as the third edition in 2005, ISO 3801 , which was issued as the first edition in 1977 ,
ISO 5084 , published as the second edition in 1996, ISO 7211-1 , ISO 7211-2 , published in 1984 as the first edition ,
ISO 7211-3 , ISO 7211-4 , ISO 7211-5 and ISO 7211-6 , issued in 2009 as the third edition, ISO 7768 , 1995
ISO 9237 , published as the first edition of ISO 13934-1
the year , and ISO 13934-2 , published as the first edition in 1999 ,
In 2004 was issued was the first version of ISO 13936-1 and ISO 13936-2 , was issued as the first edition in 2005, ISO
13936-3 , It was issued as the first edition in 2000 ISO 13937-1 , was issued as the first edition in 1999, ISO 13938-1 ,
Based on ISO 22198 , which was issued as the first edition in 2006, the technical content was changed to reflect the actual usage in Japan.
Is a Japanese Industrial Standard created by changing

Described
In this standard, the ISO method is in Annex A to Annex P , translate corresponding international standards and change technical conte
Other methods were created by changing the corresponding international standards. List the changes in the description
It is shown in Annex JA .
Attached to,
1 Scope of application
This standard applies to general woven fabrics (hereinafter ) Andreferred
a clothtocomposed
as woven of
fabrics).
continuous stitches.
Biyoko knitted fabric (hereinafter referred
) Specifies
to as the
knitted
test fabric).
method for evaluating the general characteristics of (1). However,
When there is an independent Japanese Industrial Standards test method for fastness test and physical property test,
For fabrics, flocked fabrics and adhesive fabrics for clothing, the test method specified separately shall be followed.
NOTE 1 Weft knitting includes horizontal knitting and circular knitting.
NOTE 2 The following table shows the international standards supported by this standard and the symbols that indicate the degree of comp
ISO 3071 : 2005, Textiles-Determination of pH of aqueous extract
ISO 3801 : 1977, Textiles-Woven fabrics-Determination of mass per unit length and mass per unit
area
ISO 5084 : 1996, Textiles-Determination of thickness of textiles and textile products

ISO 7211-1 : 1984 , Textiles-Woven fabrics-Construction-Methods of analysis-Part 1: Methods
for the presentation of a weave diagram and plans for drafting, denting and lifting
ISO 7211-2 : 1984 , Textiles − Woven fabrics − Construction − Methods of analysis − Part 2:
Determination of number of threads per unit length
Determination of crimp of yarn in fabric
Two
L 1096： 2010
Determination of twist in yarn removed from fabric
Determination of linear density of yarn removed from fabric
Determination of the mass of warp and weft per unit area of fabric
ISO 7768 : 2009 , Textiles-Test method for assessing the smoothness appearance of fabrics after
cleansing
ISO 9237 : 1995, Textiles-Determination of the permeability of fabrics to air

ISO 13934-1 : 1999, Textiles-Tensile properties of fabrics-Part 1: Determination of maximum force
and elongation at maximum force using the strip method
ISO 13934-2 : 1999 , Textiles-Tensile properties of fabrics-Part 2: Determination of maximum force
using the grab method
ISO 13936-1 : 2004 , Textiles-Determination of the slippage resistance of yarns at a seam in woven
fabrics−Part 1: Fixed seam opening method
fabrics−Part 2: Fixed load method
fabrics−Part 3: Needle clamp method
ISO 13937-1 : 2000 , Textiles-Tear properties of fabrics-Part 1: Determination of tear force using
ballistic pendulum method (Elmendorf)
ISO 13938-1 : 1999 , Textiles − Bursting properties of fabrics − Part 1: Hydraulic method for
determination of bursting strength and bursting distension
ISO 22198 : 2006, Textiles-Fabrics-Determination of width and length (Overall rating: MOD)
Note that the symbol MOD indicating the degree of correspondence has been modified based on ISO / IEC Guide 21-1 .
Indicates that
Two Reference standards

The following standards, by reference in this International Standard, form part of the provisions of this International Standard. these
The normative reference is its latest version
). (including any amendments).
JIS B 0601 Product Geometric Properties Specification (GPS)-Surface Texture: Contour Curve Method-Terms, Definitions and Surface Textur
Data
JIS B 7512 Steel tape measure
JIS B 7516 Metal straight scale
JIS B 7522 Fiber tape measure
JIS B 7751 Ultraviolet carbon arc lamp type light resistance tester and weather resistance tester
JIS B 7754 Xenon arc lamp type light resistance and weather resistance tester
JIS C 7601 Fluorescent lamp (for general lighting)
JIS K 1408 Sodium silicate (sodium silicate)
JIS K 2201 Industrial gasoline
JIS K 3302 Solid laundry soap
Three
L 1096： 2010
JIS K 3303 Powdered laundry soap

JIS K 3371 Laundry detergent
JIS K 8625 Sodium carbonate (reagent)
JIS L 0101 Tex method
JIS L 0105 General rules for physical test methods for textile products
JIS L 0200 How to display the knitting organization
JIS L 0208 Textile terminology-Test section
JIS L 0211 Textile terms-knitting
JIS L 0217 Indication symbols and handling methods for handling textile products
JIS L 0801 General rules for dye fastness test method
JIS L 0803 Attached white cloth for dye fastness test
JIS L 0804 Gray scale for discoloration
JIS L 0805 Gray scale for contamination
JIS L 0842 Dye fastness test method for ultraviolet carbon arc lamp light
JIS L 0843 Dye fastness test method for xenon arc lamp light
JIS L 0844 Method for testing color fastness to washing
JIS L 0860 Dye fastness test method for dry cleaning
JIS L 0891 Accelerated weather fastness test using xenon arc lamp or sunshine carbon arc lamp
Test method
JIS L 1013 Chemical fiber filament yarn test method
JIS L 1041 Testing methods for resin-processed fabrics and knits
JIS L 1057 Iron size change rate test method for woven and knitted fabrics
JIS L 1062 Testing method for woven fabric
JIS L 1092 Testing method for waterproofness of textile products
JIS L 1095 General spun yarn test method
JIS L 2101 Cotton thread
JIS L 2511 Polyester sewing thread
JIS R 6251 Polishing cloth
JIS R 6253 Water resistant abrasive paper
JIS Z 8401 How to round numbers
JIS Z 8703 Standard condition of test place
JIS Z 8805 Glass electrode for pH measurement
ThreeTerms and definitions

The main terms and definitions used in this International Standard are based on JIS L 0105 , JIS L 0208 and JIS L 0211 , as well as the follow
3.1
Initial load
This is the load at which the yarn or test piece does not stretch and unnatural wrinkles disappear.
NOTE Specifically, it is specified in each clause.
Four
L 1096： 2010
3.2
Apparent fineness
Apparent fineness of yarn obtained by loosening a woven or knitted. fabric (synonymous with fineness)
FourExam type
The type of test shall be as follows.
The numbers in parentheses indicate subclauses of the main body.
a) Organization ( 8.1 ) t) Compression rate and compression modulus ( 8.20 )
b) Dimensions ( 8.2 ) u) Hardness ( 8.21 )
1) Width ( 8.2.1 ) v) Bending resilience ( 8.22 )
2) Length ( 8.2.2 ) w) Sliding resistance ( 8.23 )
c) Mass per unit area ( 8.3 ) x) Wrinkles after washing ( 8.24 )
d) Thickness ( 8.4 ) y) Drying ( 8.25 )
e) Bulky ( 8.5 ) z) Breathable ( 8.26 )
f) Density ( 8.6 ) aa) Insulation ( 8.27 )
g) Yarn shrinkage rate ( 8.7 ) ab) Light fastness ( 8.28 )
h) Stitch length and cover factor ( 8.8 ) ac) Weather resistance ( 8.29 )
i) Composition of used yarn ( 8.9 ) ad) Glue ( 8.30 )
j) Moisture and water content ( 8.10 ) ae) Resin qualification and resin amount ( 8.31 )
k) Apparent specific gravity and stomatal volume ratioaf)( 8.11Oils
) and fats ( 8.32 )
l) Fabric bend ( 8.12 ) ag) Solvent extraction ( 8.33 )
m) Dregs and neps ( 8.13 ) ah) Washing weight loss ( 8.34 )
n) Tensile strength and elongation ( 8.14 ) ai) Training ( 8.35 )
o) Elongation modulus at constant elongation ( 8.15 )aj) Free formaldehyde amount ( 8.36 )
p) Elasticity of stretch fabrics and knits ( 8.16 ) ak) Extract pH ( 8.37 )
q) Tear strength ( 8.17 ) al) Barium activity number ( 8.38 )
r) Burst strength ( 8.18 ) am) Dimensional change ( 8.39 )
s) Wear strength and friction discoloration ( 8.19 )
Five Test condition

5.1 Testing location
Test location, JIS L 0105 of 5.1 due to the (test site).
5.2 Absolute dry mass
The absolute dry mass shall be in accordance with 5.3.2 of JIS L 0105 (absolutely dried sample or test piece).
5.3 Official moisture content
Official moisture content, JIS L 0105 of 4.1 due to the (official moisture content).
5.4 Temperature and humidity
Temperature and humidity, JIS L 0105 of 5.2 by (Measurement of temperature and humidity).
Five
L 1096： 2010
6 Collection and preparation of samples and test pieces

Collection and preparation of samples and test specimens shall be in accordance with Clause 6 of JIS L 0105 (Sample and preparation of test
Excludes tissue testing.
The number of test specimens specified in each item may be changed as necessary according to the agreement between the delivery and deliv
The number may be increased or decreased. However, in that case, it shall be added to the test report.
7 How to round numbers

The test results shall be rounded according to JIS Z 8401 , Rule B (rounding method) to obtain the specified value . Round
The number of test items shall be as specified in each test item.
8 Test method
8.1 Organization
The structure is based on the structure of the fabric and the structure of the knit.
8.1.1 Textile organization
The texture of the fabric
Law (isJIS
A method) or B method ( ISO method).
a) A Method ( JIS method) After collecting a test piece of appropriate size from a sample, warp and weft yarns are removed from the test piece
Enlarge and observe the woven fabric using a soot or magnifying glass and observe the combination
Figure
of warp
1 shows
and weft.
the
Organizational charts, such as letters or symbols. The organizational chart shows warp yarns and weft yarns on design paper.
Insert and mark the float of the warp. However, if it is clearer to express the weft float, weft float
May be marked.
Figure 1- An example of the basic Mihara texture that represents the fabric texture
b) B Law ( ISO law) Annex A shows the organization chart and the method of displaying the through hole, the through hole and the weave .
8.1.2 Knitting organization
The structure of the knitted fabric is determined by taking a specimen of an appropriate size from the sample and loosening the knitting yarn from
Create a new organization chart. The organization chart is expressed by a figure, characters or symbols that specify the combination of knitting ya
8.2 Size
The dimensions depend on the width and length.
8.2.1 width
Law (fabrics
The width of woven and knitted JIS method)
is A or B method ( ISO method).
a) A Law ( JIS method)
1) Procedure The width shall be different in three places, except that the woven or knitted fabric is placed on a flat surface and unnatural wrink
A metal straight scale specified in JIS B 7516 or a steel specified in JIS B 7512 so that
6
L 1096： 2010
Measure the distance (cm) between the ends of both ears by placing a tape measure or a scale with an equivalent or better accuracy. both
The interval depends on the fabric.
1.1) Measure the tubular knitted fabric in a flat state while keeping it cylindrical, and double this to make the full width.
1.2) In the case of non-tubular knitted fabric, incomplete portions at both ends are excluded.
1.3) In the case of one ear drop or both ear drops, this shall be noted in the test report.
2) Calculation and test results Calculate the average of the three measurements and round to one decimal place.
b) B Method ( ISO method) The width of the relaxed dough under tension is as per Annex B.
8.2.2 length
The length of woven and knitted
Lawfabric
( JIS ismethod)
A or B method ( ISO method).
a) A Method ( JIS method) The length is measured according to the JIS standard , except that the woven or knitted fabric is placed on a flat ta
B 7522 The length (m) should be reduced by using a fiber tape measure specified in
Measure up to several digits and up to two digits. In the case of using a measuring device, the scale shall be used as a reference.
Incomplete parts of both terminals are excluded.
b) B Law ( ISO method) the length of the fabric of the state in which the tension was relaxed not applied, Annex B due to.
8.3 Mass per unit area
The mass per unit area is the positive amount, the mass per unit area in the standard condition, or the per unit area of the fabric.
Depends on the weight of the warp and weft.
8.3.1 Positive amount
For the positive amount, take two specimens of approximately 200 mm × 200 mm from the sample prepared in Clause 6 and dry each of them.
Two Two
Measure the mass (g), and calculate 1 m by
Weight
the following
per unit formula.
(g / m), Calculate the average value,
Round to digits.
⎛ R ⎞ 1
Cm = W ′ × ⎜1 + ⎟×
⎝ 100 ⎠ A
Two
here, Cm: Positiveg (/ m)
g) (
W ' : Absolute dry mass
%) (
R : Official moisture content
A : Area of test piece ( mTwo)
8.3.2 Mass per unit area in standard condition
Law ( JISismethod)
The woven fabric with mass per unit area in the standard condition A or B method ( ISO method).
a) A Law ( JIS method) the mass per unit area in the standard state, Clause 6 from samples were adjusted by about
200 mm× 200 mm Specimen Two g) And
Samples were taken, and the mass under each standard condition
the following
( equation
Two Two
What 1 m Per mass ( g/m 1 Round to digits.
), Calculate the average value, and use decimal places
W
Sm =
A
Two
here, Sm: Mass per unit area in standard condition ( g / m)
W: g)
Specimen mass under standard condition (
Two
A: Specimen area ( m )
Two Two
Note 1 1 m Per mass (
Weight in standard condition g/m) Is also called the basis weight.
Note 2 g) Isofcalculated
The basis weight is determined by a) and the total mass the cloth (by the following formula.
Two Two
1 Rounded
Several points 1 m Per mass (
or less to digits, g/m).
Note 3 For woolen and jute fabrics, the basis weight or 1 Mass per hit ( kg,After the decimal
1 Ketama
point
7
L 1096： 2010
).
W
M=
L× S
Two
here, M: Weight (mass per unit area) ( g / m)
W: 1 Anti mass ( g)
L: length( m)
S: m)
width(
Note 4 22.86
In the case of silk fabric, it is expressed in silk-grain, and m,width3.81
silk-grain is thecm
length.
Equivalent to
The mass 3.75
of g The case 1 With the following expression after the decimal
1 Seek
pointand express
There are ways.
W twenty
.86 × two
Three
.81 W
Ms = L × S × Three
.75 = L × S × twenty
.Twothree
here, M :s Silky
W: 1 Anti-kneading mass ( g)
L: length( m)
S: width(cm)
b) B Law ( ISO method) mass measurement methods of unit length and per unit area of the fabric, Annex C by.
8.3.3 Warp and weft weight per unit area of fabric
The mass of warp and weft yarn per unit area of the fabricAnnex
is D depends on.
8.4 thickness
Law ( JIS
The thickness of woven and knitted method)
fabrics is A or B method ( ISO method).
a) A Five
Method ( JIS method) Thickness differs for samples adjusted according
UsingtoaClause 6 .measuring instrument for
thickness
mm), Calculate
Thickness under constant time and constant pressure the
( average, and Two
Round to digits.
If the test was performed under conditions other than those specified, this shall be noted in the test report. Also, for a certain time and
The constant pressure shall be as follows.
1) Fixed time The time it takes for the thickness under pressure to settle. Ten
normally,
Seconds.
2) Constant pressure 23.5 kPa， Wooled fabric
0.7 is
kPa, Ordinary knitted0.7 kPa And hairy knitted fabric
fabric 0.3 kPa
And
b) B Method ( ISO method) The thickness is measured according to Annex E.
8.5 Bulky
Two
The bulkiness shall be mainly applied to knitted fabrics and shall be calculated from 8.3.2 and
Round
8.4 by
to the
digits.
following formula,
t
Bu = ×1 000
Sm
Three
here, Bu : Bulky ( cm / g)
Two
Sm : Mass per unit area in standard condition ( g / m)
t: mm)
thickness(
8.6 density
The density depends on the density of the woven fabric and the density of the knitted fabric.
8.6.1 Textile density
The density of the fabric
Law ( isJIS
A method) or B method ( ISO method).
a) A Method ( JIS method) The density of the fabric is adjusted by placing the sample adjusted according to Clause 6 on a flat table,
Different except for tensionFive
and
Appropriate 50section
tension section for the location (the mm, 30 is mm, 25.4 mm And so on. )
8
L 1096： 2010
Count the number of warp and weft, calculate the average value for each unit length, and 1 Gutter
Round. In addition, if necessary, the specimen adjusted in accordance with Clause 6 shall be suitable for warp and weft at right angles.
Collect a test piece of the size, loosen the warp and weft from the test piece, count the number of each thread, unit
25 mm
You may ask for the length. However, in the case of wool fabric, it is usually perpendicular to the warp × twenty
and weft. five
mm The specimenFour Take the warp and weft from the test piece, count the number of each thread, Four
Calculate the total number of test 100 mm Expressed as the number of warp yarns and weft yarns.
pieces,
b) B Law ( ISO method) (Measurement of the yarn number per unit length) the density of the fabric, Annex F by.
8.6.2 Knit density
The density of the knitted fabric shall be determined by placing the specimen adjusted according to Clause 6 on a flat table, excluding unnatura
differentFive
Appropriate section for the location (the50section
mm, is 30 mm, 25.4 mm And so on. Wale number and
1 the unit length.
Count the number of courses, or calculate the average value of the number of wales and the number of courses for
Round to digits.
Note 1 From the measured density1.27 cm Calculate the number of wales and courses per unit, and calculate the sum of the two
It is called a degree.
Note 2 The number of wales and courses in the appropriate section when the knitted fabric is stretched using the appropriate device
Is called an eye catch. In this case, the grip width and load used in the test report shall be added.
8.7 Yarn shrinkage
The shrinkage ratio of the yarn
Act,
of Act
the B
fabric
or Act
is AC ( ISO Act).
a) A Law
1) Two
Procedure A shall be performed in the vertical and horizontal directions from the sample prepared
From in accordance with Clause 6 .
about
350 mm Take a test strip in the length of 250 mm Mark the distance of Five
Thread by book
Be careful not to get back twisted or stretched. Next, a unit with a self-recording device
Using a yarn tension tester, 250 mm age, Figure 2 depicts the growth curve - initial load and so on.
2) B Draw curve
Measurement and calculation Curve point on load-elongation a tangent at, and x Intersection on axis
C Ask for. Calculate the weaving shrinkage by the following formula, and calculateTen
theDecimal
warp and
average
weft respectively.
value
1 Round to digits.
Less than
AC
Cw = ×100
250
Where, C w: Weave shrinkage rate (%)
AC : Weave shrink length (mm)
9
L 1096： 2010
Figure 2 -Load-elongation curve
b) B Law
1) Procedure B requires that the specimen prepared in accordance with Clause 6 be used at three locations in each of the vertical and hori
Mark the distance in mm, unwind the warp and weft yarns in this mark, and straighten them under the initial load.
Measure the stretched length (mm). However, the initial load for spun yarn is specified in JIS L 1095 , 6.1 (initial load).
The initial load used for, in the case of filament yarn, JIS L 1013 of 5.1 with initial load specified in (initial load)
You. However, if this load is not used, the load used for measurement shall be added to the test report.
2) Measurement and calculation The shrinkage ratio (%) is determined by the following formula. The number of measurement points in one pla
Calculate the average value of three places for each of the warp and weft yarns for each of the five yarns, and round them to one decimal p
L − 200
Cw = × 100
200
Where, C w: Weave shrinkage rate (%)
L : Length stretched straight (mm)
c) C Law ( ISO method) woven shrinkage of the yarn, Annex G According to the.
8.8 Stitch length and cover factor
The stitch length and cover factor are as follows.
a) Stitch length The stitch length is determined by loosening five yarns in an appropriate section from the sample adjusted in accordance with Cl
The stitch length (mm) is calculated by the following formula, the average value is calculated, and two decimal places are rounded off.
Confuse. However, initial load in the case of spun yarn, JIS L 1095 of 6.1 using the initial load referred to in paragraph (initial load), Fi
For Lament yarn, JIS L 1013 of 5.1 using initial load specified in (initial load).
If this load is not used, the load used for the measurement shall be added to the test report.
L
Sl =
n
here, Sl : Stitch length (mm)

L : Length of loosened thread (mm)
n : Number of loosened stitches
b) Cover factor The cover factor is calculated from the stitch length and yarn fineness (tex) by the following formula,
Round to one digit below the point. In addition, all the cover factors for constant length counts are calculated using this formula.
be able to.
Ten
L 1096： 2010
NT
Fl =
Sl
here, Fl : Cover factor
Sl : Stitch length (mm)
NT : Fineness (tex)
NOTE The cover factor at constant weight can be determined by the following formula.
1
Fw =
Sl N
Where, Fw : Cover factor for constant weight type
Sl : Stitch length (mm)
N : Constant weight type
8.9 Composition of used yarn
1)
The composition of the yarn And
useddisplay
is fineness
as well More
as number, more shrinkage and more indication
by.
1)
note The unit of fineness (synonymous with fineness) is tex, denier or kg / m according to the unit of measurement.
It is stipulated that
8.9.1 Fineness and display
The fineness and indication are the apparent
Display
fineness
of fineness
of the and
yarnblend
and ratioby.
8.9.1.1 Apparent fineness of yarn (Tex method)
The apparent fineness of the yarn depends on the apparent fineness of the yarn in the woven fabric and the apparent fineness of the knitted fab
a) Apparent fineness of yarn in woven fabric The apparent fineness of yarn in woven fabric shall be A method ( JIS method) or B method ( ISO
According to the following.
1) A Law ( JIS method)
1.1) Procedure and measurement The sample prepared in accordance with Clause 6 is placed on two metal cut-out plates (200 mm x 200 m
Cut off the outer frame and sample three 200 mm × 200 mm test pieces. For each sheet,
Unwind 25 threads each of warp and weft and weigh the weight (mg). If necessary, remove
And so on. Refer to 8.30 for the method of removing .
1.2) Calculation The apparent fineness is calculated by the following formula, and the average value of the warp and weft yarns is calculated t
Round to less than one digit.
×W
0.Two
T=
P
1+
100
here, T : apparent fineness of the yarn (tex)

W : Mass of 25 samples (mg)
P : Weaving shrinkage rate (%)
NOTE The apparent count and apparent denier of the yarn of the fabric are the apparent count and apparent denier of the yarn.
There is a method of measuring by the same method as the degree (Tex method) and obtaining by the following formula.
Two
952.7 ⎛ P ⎞
Cc = × ⎜1 + ⎟
W ⎝ 100 ⎠
Five
000 ⎛ P ⎞
Mc = × ⎜1 + ⎟
W ⎝ 100 ⎠
8 267.7 ⎛ P ⎞
Fc = × ⎜1 + ⎟
W ⎝ 100 ⎠
11
L 1096： 2010
⎛ P ⎞
J c = 0.005 8 ×W × ⎜1 + ⎟
⎝ 100 ⎠
1.8 × W
D=
P
1+
100
here, Cc : Cotton count

M c : Metric count
F c : Hemp count
Jc : Jute count
D : Denier
W : Mass of 25 samples (mg)
P : Weaving shrinkage rate (%)
2) B Law ( ISO method) measurement of the apparent fineness of the yarn was removed from the fabric, Annex H depends on.
b) Apparent fineness of yarn in knitted fabric (tex method) The apparent fineness of knitted fabric is as follows.
1) Procedure The apparent fineness of the yarn in the knitted fabric is determined by loosening five yarns from the sample adjusted in accorda
Apply an initial load to these yarns and measure their length (mm). Also measure the mass (mg).
1.1) Initial load when the initial load spun yarn of the yarn, JIS L 1095 of 6.1 with initial load specified in (initial load), off
For Iramento yarn, JIS L 1013 of 5.1 using initial load specified in (initial load). However, this load
If no weight is used, the load used for the measurement shall be added to the test report.
1.2) The length of the yarn to be collected is usually not less than 1 m in total length.
NOTE If the yarn cannot be unraveled on a warp knitted fabric, measure the diameter of the yarn using a microscope, etc.
The hanging fineness may be determined. In this case, this shall be noted in the test report.
2) Calculation From the measured values, the apparent fineness is calculated by the following formula, and the average of the five measureme
Round to digits.
W
T = ×1 000
L
here, T : apparent fineness of the yarn (tex)
W : Mass of sample (mg)
L : Yarn length (mm)
NOTE The apparent count and denier of the knitted yarn are determined in the same way as the apparent fineness (tex method) of the ya
Therefore, it was measured and calculated from the mass per 1 m (mg) by the following formula, with one decimal place
There is a way to round.
590.Five
Cc =
W′
1 000
Mc =
W′
1 653.Five
Fc =
W′
W′
Jc =
34.45
D = W′ × 9
12
L 1096： 2010
here, Cc : Cotton count

M c : Metric count
F c : Hemp count
Jc : Jute count
D : Denier
W ' : Mass of 1 m sample (mg)
8.9.1.2 Indication of fineness (tex method) and blend ratio

The indication of the fineness (tex method) and blending ratio of woven and knitted fabric is as follows.
a) Display of fineness display fineness of (Tex system) (Tex system), JIS L 0101 of 7. According to the (display method).
Note usually fineness, it will be displayed using the Tex, the case of obtaining the display of the count, JIS L 1095 of 4.2 (turn
Hand display). When the fineness is indicated by denier, the following shall be applied.
120 denier ......... 120 D
b) The display of the display blended rate of the blended rate, JIS L 1095 of 4.3 due to the (display of the blended rate).
8.9.2 More number, more shrinkage and more indication
The more number, more shrinkage and more designation of woven and knitted fabric are as follows.
Law ( However,
ISO law) more B
Applies to textiles only.
a) Twisted numbers are as follows.
1) A Law ( JIS number more yarn in process) fabric Clause 6 per yarn loosened samples adjusted by,
JIS L 1095 According to 9.15 (more numbers).
2) B Law ( ISO measurement of more of the yarn taken from the Act) fabric, Annex I due to.
b) The shrinkage rate than the more shrinkage, JIS L 1095 of 9.16 due to (more shrinkage).
c) Viewing from the display of more, JIS L 1095 of 4.4 by (more display).
8.10 Moisture and moisture content
The moisture content and moisture content shall be as follows.
a) Moisture content The moisture content was determined by taking two specimens of approximately 200 mm × 200 mm from the sample adjuste
The weight before drying (g) and the absolute dry weight (g) are weighed, and the moisture content (%) is calculated by the following formula.
Calculate the average value and round it to one decimal place.
W − W Two
Mr = 1 ×100
W Two
here, M r: Moisture percentage(%)

W 1: Weight before drying (g)
W Two
: Absolute dry mass (g)
b) Moisture content The moisture content is calculated from the following equation using the same procedure as for the moisture content, and th
And round to one decimal place.
W1 − WTwo
mc = × 100
W1
here, m c: %)
Moisture content (
W1: g) (
Weight before drying
WTwo
: Absolute drygmass
) (
8.11 Apparent specific gravity and pore volume ratio
The apparent specific gravity and porosity of woven and knitted fabric are as follows.
a) Two
Apparent specific gravity The apparent specific gravity is calculated by the following formula
Round
fromto
8.3.2
digits.
and 8.4.
13
L 1096： 2010
Sm
Ag =
000 × t
1
here, Ag: Apparent specific gravity
Two Two
Sm : 1 m in standard condition Weight per unit (g / m)
t : thickness (mm)
b) The stomatal volume
Pore volume ratio a) Calculate
ratio is from the apparent specific gravity and fiber specific gravity obtained in
Round to one digit below the point.
S − Ag
Pv = × 100
S
here, Pv: Pore volume ratio (%)
S : Specific gravity of fiber
Ag: Apparent specific gravity
Using the specific gravity of each fiber
TableShown
1as a reference
in However, for fibers for which the specific gravity is indicated in the range,
The specific gravity of the fiber
JISinLadvance
1013 of 8.17 Measured by (specific gravity and density) and mixed
In this case, the average specific gravity of the constituent fibers is calculated by performing a calculation in proportion to the mixing ratio, and t
Table
− Specific
1 gravity of fiber (reference)
Fiber type specific gravity Fiber type specific gravity
Cotton 1.58 Vinylidene 1.70
Hemp (flax and ramie) 1.50 Polyvinyl chloride 1.39
Silk 1.33 Polyester (PET) 1.38
Wool 1.32 Acrylic 1.17
Rayon 1.50 Acrylic 1.23 to 1.28
Polynosic 1.50 Polyethylene 0.94-0.96
Cupra 1.50 Polypropylene 0.91
Acetate 1.32 Polyurethane 1.00-1.30
Triacetate 1.30 Benzoate 1.34
Promix 1.22 Polyclar 1.32
Vinylon 1.26-1.30 Aramid 1.37-1.45
Nylon 1.14
8.12 Cloth bend

The texture bend is in the weft or course direction, and in the vertical or wale direction, as follows.
a) Bend in horizontal or course direction
1) Clause6 For three different locations of the sample adjusted by Figure
Measurement One
3 of woven and knitted
A weft or course line AB from ear end A to another ear end B along the weft or course thread
Pull. Next, draw a line perpendicular to the ear edge from A, and let C be the point at which it intersects with the other ear edge.
It is a search of (mm), Figure 3
Measure the maximum distance b (mm) between the ACs shown in (1).
2) Calculate the cloth bending rate (%) in the horizontal or course direction using the following formula, and calculate the average of thre
Calculation
Calculate the value and round it to one decimal place.
b
Db = ×100
a
here, Db: Curving rate in horizontal or course direction (%)
a : Width (mm)
b : Maximum distance (mm)
14
L 1096： 2010
a) Example of skew b) Example of bending c) Example of S- shaped bending
− The
Figure 3 type and measurement point of the weave in the horizontal direction or course direction
b) Curving in vertical or wale direction (skew)

1) Measurement
Clause6 From the sample adjusted by Figure 4 woven and knitted edges
Like
Draw two lines, line DE and line FG, at 1 m intervals at right angles to the line, and mark point A approximately at the center of line DE.
Let C be the point of intersection of the cloth line in the vertical or wale direction and another line (line FG). Then perpendicular from A
And set the intersection with the other line (line FG) as B, and measure the distance between B and C at three different locations.
You.
2) Calculation
Calculate the cloth bending rate (%) in the vertical or wale direction by the following formula and calculate the average value
And round to one decimal place.
c
Wb = × 100
1 000
here, W b: Curving rate in vertical or wale direction (%)

c : Cloth bend (skew) distance (mm)
Unit m
− Curving
Figure 4 in vertical or wale direction (skew)
8.13 Dregs and neps

Refuse and nep 6 From the sample prepared by the above procedure, three test pieces of about 200 mm × 200 mm were collected and
Fifteen
L 1096： 2010
Using a cutting device, count the number of scum and neps adhering to the front and back within an area of 100 mm × 100 mm.
Calculate the average and round to the nearest integer.
8.14 Tensile strength and elongation
Tensile strength and elongation areOr
JIS Law And
ISO Law
8.14.1 JIS Law
JIS Law
Is A Law
(Strip method) , B Law
(Grab method), C Law
(Wet strip method) or D Law
(When wet
(Love method).
a) A (Strip
Method (strip method) Method A method) is a test method for tensile strength and elongation at the standard state.
You.
1) Sample preparationThe sampleApreparation is based on either the labeled strip method or the cut strip method.
method
For the number of samples, take three woven or five knitted fabrics.
1.1) In the case of the labeled strip method, apply to the fabric,
TableClause
2 in any of the conditions
6 Adjusted by
Three test pieces were taken from the sample, and the same number of yarns were removed from both sides of the width to obtain the specifi
Use it as a test piece.
In the case of heavy cloth, if the yarn on both sides of the test piece comes off the fabric structure during the test,
Figure
Shall leave at least four yarns on each side of the 30 mm wide specimen, 50 5from the end of both grips as
Cut this at a distance of mm and use it as a test specimen.
1.2) In the case of the cut strip method, it is suitable for knitted fabrics and special fabrics that cannot be tested by the labeled strip method.
Use and clause
6 From the specimen adjusted by the vertical or wale direction and the horizontal or course direction
TableCut
Along the direction 2 to the specified width of the test piece.
Table
− Preparation
2 of test strip for strip method
Fabric type Specimen when cutting and
Specimen
collecting
widthSpecimen
Size of mm Number
W mm x L mm
fabric General woven fabric Approx. 55 x Approx. 300 50 Three
Approx. 30 x Approx. 200 25
Heavy cloth Approx. 40 x Approx. 300 30
Density 60 tubes / 5 cm or more
Density less than 60 tubes / About
5 cm 50 x about 300
knitting 50 x about 300 50 Five
25 x about 200 25
Unit: mm
− Preparation
Figure 5 of test pieces
16
L 1096： 2010
2) operation TableTest
3 performance.
Under initial load, the test piece is gripped by a tensile tester with appropriate under any of the conditions
And measure the breaking strength (N) and elongation (%). However, cut within 10 mm from grip
Excluded items or abnormally cut items are excluded. If the load at cutting is not the maximum load, the maximum load (N)
And the elongation (%) at that time are taken as measured values.
The initial load of the woven fabric in the normal case is a load equivalent to a 10 m test piece, and the initial load of the knitted fabric is 29
However, if a different load is used, it shall be added to the test report.
− Test
Table 3 conditions for strip method
Testing machine type
Fabric type Specimen widthGrip interval Tensile speed
mm mm mm / min
General woven fabric 50 200 a)
150 ± 10 or 300 ± 20
Constant speed tension
Generaltype
textiles 25 100
Heavy cloth 30 200 200 ± 10
fabric
General woven fabric 50 200
Constant speed extension
General textiles
type 25 100
Approximately 50% or 100% elongation rate per minute
Heavy cloth 30 200
50 200
Constant speed tension
− type 150 ± 10 or 300 ± 20
25 100
knitting
50 200
Constant speed extension
− type
25 100 Approximately 50% or 100% elongation rate per minute
note In the case of wool fabric, it shall be 150 mm.
a)
3) The test results are calculated by: The test conditions shall be added to the test report.
Calculation
3.1) For the woven fabric, calculate the average of three times each in the vertical and horizontal directions, and round to three significant figures.
3.2) For knitted fabrics, the average value is calculated five times in the wale and course directions and rounded to one decimal place.
b) B Method (grab method) (Grab
Methodmethod)
B is the test method for tensile strength and elongation under standard conditions.
1) Sample preparationIs method
a clause6BFrom the sample prepared as described above, a test piece 100 mm wide and 150 mm long
Collect as in
1.1) For textiles Take three test pieces each in the warp direction and the weft direction.
Shall be taken in parallel with the weft, so that the length direction is parallel to the weft.
1.2) For knitting Five specimens were taken in each of the wale direction and the course direction.
The test piece shall be taken so that the length direction is parallel to the course and the length direction is parallel to the course.
2) Using a tensile tester with appropriate performance,Figure
operation The6 grip interval is 76 mm, as shown
The size should be 25 mm × 25 mm on the front side and 51 mm × 25 mm or more on the back side under both initial loads.
See, Table Perform
4 the test under the following conditions to determine the strength at break (N) and elongation (%). However, grab it
Cuts within 10 mm or abnormal cuts are excluded.
The initial load of the woven fabric in the normal case is the load equivalent to a 10 m test piece, and the initial load of the knitted fabric is
A load of mN is used, but if a different load is used, this shall be noted in the test report.
17
L 1096： 2010
Unit: mm
− Preparation
Figure 6 of test pieces
Table
− Grab
4 method test conditions
Sample size Specimen widthGrip interval Tensile speed
Testing machine type
W mm x L mm mm mm mm / min Number of test pieces
Constant speed tension type
Woven 100 x about 150 100 76 300 ± 20 3
Constant speed extension type
Constant speed tension type 150 ± 10 or 300 ± 20
Knitting 100 x about 150 100 76 50 ± 10, 100 ± 10 Five
Constant speed extension type
Or 300 ± 20
3) Calculation
The test results are calculated by: The test conditions shall be added to the test report.
3.1) For the woven fabric, calculate the average of three times each in the vertical and horizontal directions, and round to three significant figures
3.2) For knitted fabrics, the average value is calculated five times in the wale and course directions and rounded to one decimal place.
c) C (Wet strip method) is a method of measuring the tensile strength and elongation in the wet state.
Method (wet strip method) C method
This test method is mainly applied to textiles.
1) procedure
The wet test is a) of A Law
(Strip method) Test specimens collected in separate containers
And submerge in water (20 ° C ± 2 ° C) until it sinks by its own weight, or submerge in water for at least 1 hour.
When it is necessary to completely wet a non-wetting fabric, JIS L 0860 Nonionic surface activity specified in
Diluents of 0.1% or less of the agent may be used. In this case, it shall be thoroughly washed before the test. Trial
The specimen should be removed from
a)the A Law
of water Iwithin
t is measured
1 minute.
by the same method as described above.
2) Calculation
a) of A Law
The tensile strength (N) and the elongation (%) are determined by the same method as described above.
d) D (Wet D
Method (wet grab method) Method grab method) is a test method for tensile strength and elongation in the wet state
It mainly applies to textiles.
1) The wet test is
procedure b) of B Law
Put the test piece collected by (grab method) in a separate container,
18
L 1096： 2010
Leave in water (20 ° C ± 2 ° C) until it subsides by its own weight, or submerge in water for at least 1 hour. Wet
When it is necessary to completely wet a difficult fabric, JIS L 0860 Of nonionic surfactant specified in
A diluent of 0.1% or less may be used. In this case, it shall be thoroughly washed before the test. The test piece is
Within 1 minute of getting out
b) of
of the water
The measurement is performed in the same manner as described above.
B Law
2) b) of B Law
Calculation The tensile strength (N) and the elongation (%) are determined by the same method as described above.
8.14.2 ISO Law
ISO Law
Is E Law
(Strip method) or F Law
(Grab method), as follows.
a) E Method (strip method) Of tensile strength and elongation
(Strip method)
E Law Annex J by.
b) F Of tensile strength and elongation
Method (grab method) (Grab method)
F Law Annex K by.
8.15 Elongation modulus at constant elongation
The elongation modulus at A Law
constant
(Elongation
elongation
elastic B Law
is modulus at constant (elongation)
Elongation or
modulus at constant length extension).
8.15.1 A Method (Elongation modulus at constant elongation)
Is applied mainly to textiles and is based on the one-time or iterative method.
A Law
a) The law
Elongation modulus A at constant applies mainly to textiles.
elongation
1) Preparation of Clause
6 From the sample adjusted by
sample 8.14.1 a) of A Law
(Strip method) or 8.14.1 b) of
B Law
In the same manner as in the (grab method), collect three test pieces in the vertical direction and in the horizontal direction.
2) operation
Using a constant-speed extension-type tensile tester with a self-recording device, apply an initial load,
The speed is increased to a constant elongation (103% or 105% of the original length) at 10% of the gripping interval per minute,
Hold for a minute. Next, remove the load at the same speed, hold it for 3 minutes, then pull it again at the same speed to a constant elongation
( Measure
extend. Recorded load-elongation curveFig. 7 the residual elongation from).
2.1) In the normal case, the initial load of theAfabric
load equivalent
is 10 to the m test piece was used, but a different load was used.
If applicable, add it to the test report.
2.2) The loading range of the recording paper should be at least 50% of full scale at constant elongation.
New The speed of the recording paper shall be such that the constant elongation corresponds to at least 50 mm on the recording paper.
Fig. −7 Load-elongation curve
3) Calculation
The elongation modulus is calculated by the following formula, and the average value of the vertical and horizontal directions is calcul
Round to an integer place. The test conditions are added to the test report.
19
L 1096： 2010
L − L1
Ee = ×100
L
here, Ee : Elongation modulus (%)
L : Constant elongation (mm)
L1: Residual elongation (mm)
b) The cyclic
Elongation modulus at repeated constant rateelongation modulus
elongation Repeat
A Law is the same operation 5 or 10 times under the same conditions as
After returningA Law
Repeated elongation modulus was calculated using the same formula as above, and the average value of the three vertical and
Expressed by In this case, the number of repetitions shall be added to the test report.
8.15.2 B Method (elongation modulus at constant length extension)
Applies mainly to textiles.
B Law
a) of A Law
Preparation of sample 8.14.1 a)(Strip method) or 8.14.1 b) of B Law
(Grab method)
Collect five test pieces in each of the horizontal and vertical directions.
b) operation
Using a tensile tester, stretch to 10 mm (5% of original length), remove the load immediately after holding for 1 minute,
After leaving it for 3 minutes, apply an initial load and measure the residual elongation.
Note that the initial load of the woven fabric in the normal case is a load equivalent to a 10 m test piece, but a different load is used.
If any, add them to the test report.
c) Calculation
Calculate the elongation modulus by the following formula, calculate the average value of 5 times each in the vertical and horizontal dire
Round to a few places.
Ten− L1
Ee = × 100
Ten
here, Ee : Elongation modulus (%)
L1: Residual elongation (mm)
8.16 Stretchability of stretch fabrics and knits
Elasticity is elongation rate, elongation modulus, (elongation
Residual strain
recovery
rate, elongation
rate) force and stress relaxation rate. However,
Compressed fabric is made of elastic yarn (such as synthetic fiber elastic bulky yarn, polyurethane yarn, etc.), or
It refers to a woven fabric that has been made particularly elastic by other methods.
8.16.1 Growth rate
Elongation mainly applies to textiles
A Law (Constant speed ,extension
(Constant
B Law method)
load method for fabric)
C Law(Repeated
or constant load method)
Mainly applies to knitted fabrics (Knitted constant load method).
D Law
a) A Is appliedmethod)
Method (constant speed extension mainly toMethod
textiles,Aas follows.
1) Preparation of Clause
sample
6 From the sample adjusted by Approx. 60 mm x approx. 300 mm in vertical and horizontal directions
Alternatively, take three test pieces of about 60 mm x about 600 mm each, and remove approximately the same number of threads from both s
To a width of 50 mm.
2) Constant speed extension type tensile tester with self-recording
operation The width of
device
the test piece is usually 1 m.
Load equivalent to the gravitational
200 mm
forceor(N)
500 mm under the initial load (value to the integer place)
The test piece was mounted in such a way as to obtain a load-elongation curve at a tensile speed of 100% of the gripping interval per minute.
Draw.
3) From this curve, the elongation (%) under a load of 14.7 N was calculated, and the average of the three measurements was calculated.
Calculation
Round it. However, a load other than 14.7 N may be used if necessary. In this case, test the load used.
Appended to the test report.
b) B Method (constant load method for fabric) mainly
Is applied Methodto Btextiles, as follows.
20
L 1096： 2010
1) Step a) of A Law
For a test specimen similar to (constant speed elongation method), it has a tensile tester or equivalent performance
Using an apparatus, fix one end of the test piece with the upper clamp, and usually apply a 1 m length of the test piece width to the other end.
Load equivalent to gravity (N)
Apply an initial load (value up to the integer place). Then at 200 mm or 500 mm intervals
Mark and apply a load of 14.7 N gently. Measure the length (mm) between marks after holding for 1 minute. However,
The load and / or time (1 minute) other than 14.7 N may be changed as necessary. In these cases, to that effect
Is added to the test report.
2) Calculation
Calculate the elongation (%) by the following formula, calculate the average value of three times, and round it to one decimal place.
L1 − L0
Ep = × 100
L0
here, Ep: Growth rate(%)
L0: Length between original marks (200 mm or 500 mm)
L1: 14.7 Length between marks after applying N load and holding for 1 minute (mm)
c) C Method (repeated constant loadIsmethod) C method
applied mainly to textiles, as follows.
1) Step a) of A Law b) of B method),
For the same test piece as (constant speed elongation As in (constant load method for fabric),
Law
Load equivalent to gravity applied to a length of 1 m in the width of(The
a normal
valuespecimen
up to the (N)
integer place)
Mark at intervals of 200 mm or 500 mm. After returning to the no-load state, apply a load of 14.7 N, and then
Repeat 4 times at a cycle of 5 seconds until returning to theNext,
stateapply
of load.
the fifth load and hold for 30 seconds.
Measure the length (mm) between them. However, a load other than 14.7 N may be used if necessary. in this case,
The load used is added to the test report.
2) Calculate the elongation (%) by the following formula, calculate the average value of three times, and round it to one decimal place.
Calculation
L1 − L0
Ep = × 100
L0
here, Ep: Growth rate(%)
L0: Length between original marks (200 mm or 500 mm)
L1: Length between marks after applying the fifth load and holding for 30 seconds (mm)
d) D Method (knitted fabric constant Applies to knitted
load method) D fabric,
methodas follows.
1) Clause6 5 specimens were taken from the sample prepared in
procedure
TableOne
And using a tensile tester or equipment of appropriate performance5 end of the test piece is
With an initial load of 29 mN on the other end, then 76 mm in the grab method and cut-strip method.
2)
Mark at intervals of 200 mm or 100 mm and gently apply a constant Length
load. between marks after holding for 1 minute with
Measure the length (mm).
2)
note The constant load means a product that is suitable for the product type, wale direction and course direction.
For example, 0.98 N and 2.94 N per 10 mm width.
− Test
Table 5 condition
Method Sample size Test width Grip interval Initial load Tensile speed
W mm x L mm mm mm mN mm / min
Grab method 100 x about 150 100 76 50 ± 10, 100 ± 10 or 300 ± 20
Cut strip 29 Approximately 50%
50 x about 300 50 200
-flops method or 100% elongation rate per minute
2) Calculate the elongation (%) by the following formula, calculate the average value, and round it to one decimal place. Ma
Calculation
twenty one
L 1096： 2010
The test conditions shall be added to the test report.

L −L
Ep = 1 × 100
L
here, Ep: Constant load elongation (%)
L : Length between original marks (mm)
L1: Length between marks after applying a constant load and holding for 1 minute (mm)
8.16.2 Elongation modulus (elongation recovery rate) and residual strain rate
Law
Elongation modulus (elongation recovery rate) and residual strain rate mainlyAapply
(Repeated
to wovenconstant
fabrics speed ,constant
B-1 elongation method)
(Constant load, method)
Law (Constant elongation method after elongation
B-2 Law (Constant
C Law measurement)
elongation
or method after repeated elongation measurement)
In addition, mainly applied to D
knitted
Law(Repeated
fabrics constant extension
E method)
(Repeated
Law or constant load method).
a) A Is applied
Method (repeated constant speed constant mainly tomethod)
elongation textiles, as follows.
Method A
1) ofa)A Law
Procedure 8.16.1 A constant-speed extension type tensile test with a self-recording device for the same test piece as (constant-speed ex
Load equivalent to gravity applied to a length of 1 m in the width of the test piece (N)
(Values up to the integer place)
At the initial load, attach the test piece so that the grip distance is 200 mm or 500 mm, and
At a pulling speed of 100% of the bite a) of A Law
interval
8.16.1 1 minute after stretching the specimen to 80% of the elongation determined in
And then return to the original position at the same speed and hold for 3 minutes. This is repeated 10 times, and the same speed
Fig. D
Stretch by degrees 8 raw a load-elongation curve shown in FIG. Provided, however, that other elongation and / or
The number of returns may be changed. These test conditions are added to the test report.
Fig. −8 load − Elongation curve
2) From
Measurement and this curve, the elongation modulus (elongation recovery
calculation (%)rate)
Andisresidual
calculated
strain
by rate
the following
(%) equation.
Calculate the average of three times, and round to one decimal place.
L L′
Er = Ten− Ten × 100
LTen
′
LTen
Rs = ×100
L0
here, Er : Elongation modulus (elongation(%) recovery rate)
Rs: Residual strain rate (%)
LTen: 8.16.1 a) of A Law80% of the elongation obtained in (mm)
L T' en： Residual elongation after repeated loading 10 times (mm)
L0: Length between original grips (200 mm or 500 mm)
b) B-1 Method (constant load method) B-1mainly
Is applied methodto textiles, as follows.
twenty two
L 1096： 2010
1) ofa)A Law
Procedure 8.16.1 For a test piece similar to (constant speed elongation method), use a tensile tester or equivalent performance.
One end of the test piece is fixed with an upper clamp using a device with
Load equivalent to the gravitational
(Valueforce
up to(N)
the integer place) and apply 200 mm from the lower end of the clamp
Or mark at 500 mm. Then, apply a load of 14.7 N gently and hold for 1 hour.
Measure (mm). Next, remove the load, apply the initial load 30 seconds or 1 hour later, and again measure the length between the marks.
Figure
measure( 9 . However, if necessary, the load and / or time (1 hour) other than 14.7 N may be changed.
reference)
No. These test conditions are added to the test report.
Figure
− Schematic
9 diagram of constant load method
2) Elongation
Measurement and modulus (elongation recovery rate)
calculation (%) And residual strain rate (%)
After 3 seconds or 1 hour, calculate the average of three times, and round to one decimal place. Load
The standing time after removal shall be added to the test report.
L − L′
Er = 1 1 ×100
L1 − L0
L1′ − L0
Rs = × 100
L0
here Er : Elongation modulus (elongation(%) recovery rate)
L0: Length between marks when initial load is applied (200 mm or 500 mm)
L1: 14.7 Length between marks after applying N load for 1 hour (mm)
L 1' : When the initial load is applied 30 seconds or 1 hour after the load is removed
Length between marks (mm)
c) B-2 Is applied mainly
Method (constant elongation method after elongation to textiles,B-2
measurement) as follows.
method
1) Procedure B-2 8.16.1 a) of A Law
Is method For the same test piece as (constant speed elongation of B-1 Law
8.16.2 b) method), (Constant load
Load (N) at the other end, which is equivalent to the gravity applied to a length of 1 m in the width
(Upoftothe
integer
test specimen as in the case of
The initial load), and then mark the specimen at 200 mm or 500 mm intervals. 8.16.1 b) of B
Elongate the test piece to 80% of the elongation determined by (constant load method for fabric), hold for 1 hour, and remove the load.
Law
After 30 seconds or 1 hour, apply an initial load and measure the length (mm) between marks.
The standing time after removing the load shall be added to the test report. However, if necessary, other
twenty three
L 1096： 2010
Elongation and / or time (1 hour) may be varied. These test conditions are added to the test report.
2) Calculation
Elongation modulus (elongation recovery rate)
(%) And residual strain rate (%), and after 30 seconds or
One hour later, calculate the average of three times, and round to one decimal place.
L − L′
Er = 1 1 ×100
L1 − L0
L1′ − L0
Rs = × 100
L0
L1: 8.16.1 b) of B LawAt 80% of the elongation calculated in
L 1' : After removing the load, apply the initial load 30 seconds or 1 hour later.
Length between marks when touched (mm)
d) C Method (constant elongation method after) repeated
C Law
Iselongation measurement)
applied mainly to textiles, as follows.
1) ofa)A Law
Procedure 8.16.1 For the same test piece as (constant speed elongation
8.16.2 b) method),
of B-1 Law
Same as (constant load method)
At the other end, a load (N) equivalent to the gravity normally applied to a length of 1 m(Values
in the width
up to of
thethe
integer
test piece
place)
The initial load shall be applied, and then the specimen shall be marked at intervals of8.16.1
200 mm of 500
c) or mm.
(Repeat
C Law
The test piece was stretched to 80% of the elongation determined by the reverse constant load method, held for 1 hour, and then the load was r
After 1 second or 1 hour, apply an initial load and measure the length (mm) between marks. Hold time after removing the load
Add it to the test report. However, other growth and / or time (1 hour) may be changed if necessary.
Good. These test conditions are added to the test report.
2) Elongation modulus (elongation recovery rate)
Calculation (%) And residual strain rate (%), and after 30 seconds or
One hour later, calculate the average of three times, and round to one decimal place.
L − L′
Er = 1 1 ×100
L1 − L0
L1′ − L0
Rs = × 100
L0
L1: 8.16.1 c) of C LawAt 80% of the elongation calculated in
L 1' : After removing the load, apply the initial load 30 seconds or 1 hour later.
Length between marks when touched (mm)
e) D Appliesmethod)
Method (repeated constant elongation mainly toDknitted
methodfabrics, and is as follows.
1) Clause6 5 specimens were taken from the sample prepared in
procedure
Using a constant-speed extension-type tensile tester with a self-recording
Table After
5 stretching device.
to a certain elongation depending on the conditions
Hold for 1 minute. Then return to the original position at the same speed and hold for 3 minutes. After repeating
Figurethis operation,
TenDraw a load-elongation curve such as
In the case of a wet test, use a test specimen that has been sufficiently wetted with water (20 ° C ± 2 ° C).
1.1) For the constant elongation, those suitable for the variety, wale direction and course direction are used, for example, 10%,
30%, 50%, etc.
twenty four
L 1096： 2010
1.2) The number of repetitions is 1, 5, or 10 times, which is suitable for the type, wale direction and course direction, respectively.
Use numbers.
Figure− 10
load − Elongation curve
2) The
Measurement and residual elongation is measured from this curve, and the elastic modulus at constant elongation (elongation recovery rate
calculation
(%), Calculate the average in the wale direction and the course direction, and round to one decimal place.
You. The test conditions shall be added to the test report.
′
L − Ln
Ee = n × 100
Ln
here, Ee : Elongation modulus at constant elongation(%)
(elongation recovery rate)
Ln: Constant elongation (mm)
Ln' : Residual elongation (mm)
f) E Method (repeated constant loadApplies
method)mainly to knitted fabrics, and is as follows.
E method
1) procedure
Clause6 5 specimens were taken from the sample prepared in
And using a tensile tester or equipment of appropriate performance
TableWith
5 a constant load applied according to the conditions of 1
Immediately after holding for 1 minute, remove the load and leave for another 3 minutes. After repeating this operation,
Measure the length (mm) between the marks.
1.1) For the constant load, one that is suitable for each type, wale direction and course direction is used.
There are 0.98 N and 2.94 N per 1 cm width.
1.2) The number of repetitions should be 1, 5, 10, etc., which is appropriate for the type, wale direction and course direction.
Used.
2) Elongation elastic modulus at constant load (elongation(%),
Calculation recovery
The wale
rate)direction
by the following
and course
formula
direction
Calculate the average of 5 times for each direction and round to one decimal place. In addition, the test conditions are attached to the test repor
Write.
L0 − L1
Ee = × 100
L0 − L
here, Ee : Elongation elastic modulus at constant load
(%)
(elongation recovery rate)
L : Length between original marks (mm)
L0: Length between marks after applying a constant load and holding for 1 minute (mm)
L1: When the initial load is applied after removing the load for about 3 minutes
twenty five
L 1096： 2010
8.16.3 Extension force

A Law
The extension force
(Elongation
is B Law
force at constant elongation(of
Elongation
the fabric)
force
or at constant elongation of the knitted fabric).
a) A Applies tooftextiles,
Method (Stretching force at constant elongation fabric) asMethod
follows.A
1) 8.16.1 a) of A Law
procedure A constant-speed extension type tensile test with a self-recording device for the same test piece as (constant-speed ex
Is equivalent to gravity applied to a length of 1 m in the width of the test piece [Value to the integer]place
Initial(N)
load
The test piece shall be mounted with a grip distance of 200 mm or 500 mm under
At 100% pull rate 8.16.1 a) of A Law Extend the test piece to 80% of the elongation obtained in
The weight (N) is determined from the load-elongation curve. However, other elongations may be used if necessary.
2) Calculate the average of the three rounds and round to one decimal place. The test conditions shall be added to the test report.
Calculation
You.
b) B Method (stretching force at constant stretching of knitted
Applies mainly fabric) fabrics,
to knitted Methodand
B is as follows.
1) procedure
Clause6 5 specimens were taken from the sample prepared in
Using a constant-speed extension-type tensile tester with a self-recording
Table Under
5 certaindevice.
conditions, elongation to a certain
The load when held for one minute is determined from the load-elongation curve.
Note that the constant elongation is one that is suitable for the variety, wale direction and course direction, for example, 10%,
Use 30%, 50%, etc.
2) Calculate the average of the five measurements and round to one decimal place. The test conditions shall be added to the test report.
Calculation
You.
8.16.4 Stress relaxation rate
Stress relaxation rate is mainly applied to textiles,
A Law (Single load method) and / or B Law
(Repeated load method)
You.
a) A Method ( single load method)
1) 8.16.1 a) of A Law
procedure A constant-speed extension type tensile test with a self-recording device for the same test piece as (constant-speed ex
Is equivalent to gravity applied to a length of 1 m in the width of the test piece [Value to the integer]place
Initial(N)
load
The test piece shall be mounted with a grip distance of 200 mm or 500 mm under
At 100% pull rate 8.16.1 a) of A Law
After stretching the test piece to 80% of the elongation determined in
Hold FigureDraw
11 a load-elongation curve shown in FIG. However, other elongations may be used if necessary. This
In the case of, add the elongation to the test report.
− 11
Figure load − Elongation curve
26
L 1096： 2010
2) Calculation
Calculate the stress relaxation rate (%) by the following formula, calculate the average of three times, and round to one decimal place.
You.
T0 − T1
Sr = ×100
T0
here, Sr : Stress relaxation rate (%)
T0: 8.16.1 a) of A Law Load when stretched to 80% of the stretch determined in
Heavy (N)
T1: Load after holding for 10 minutes (N)
b) B Method (repeated load method)
1) 8.16.1 a) of A Law
procedure 8.16.1 a) of
For the same test piece as (constant speed elongation A Law
method),
80% of the growth determined in
Extend the test piece until it is held for 1 minute, then return to the original position and hold for 3 minutes. Repeat this
The tenth time, after stretching to 80%, hold for 3 minutesFigureDraw
12 a load-elongation curve shown in FIG. However,
Other elongation and / or number of repetitions may be changed as needed. The test report describes these test conditions.
It appends to.
Figure− 12
Load-elongation curve
2) Calculate the stress relaxation rate (%) by the following formula, calculate the average of three times, and round to one decimal place.
Calculation
You.
T0 − TTen
Sr = ×100
T0
here, Sr : Stress relaxation rate (%)

T0 : 8.16.1 a) of A Law Load when stretched to 80% of the stretch determined in
Heavy (N)
TTen： Load (N) after holding for 3 minutes while being stretched 10 times repeatedly
8.17 Tear strength
The tear strength is (Single tongue method), B Law
A Law (Double tongue method)
, C Law
(Trapezoid method) , D Law
(pen
Juram method) or (ISO pendulum method).
E Law
8.17.1 A Method (single tongue method)
A Law
Is A-1 Law
(Single tongue method) or A-2 Law
(Single tongue method).
a) A-1 Applies
Method A-1 methodto woven and knitted fabrics, as follows.
27
L 1096： 2010
1) procedure
Clause6 From the sample prepared by the procedure described above, a test of about 50 mm x about 250 mm or about 100 mm x about 2
For woven fabrics, three pieces each in the vertical and horizontal directions, and for the knitted fabric, the wale direction and course direction
Collect 5 specimens in each direction.
1.1) The woven fabric shall have a 100 mm cut at the center of the short side and at right angles to the short side, and then a clamp with a width of
Using a tensile tester, set the distance between the grips of the test piece toFigure
100 mm.
Put
13each tongue up and down like
Insert at right angles to the clamp.
1.2) When knitting in the wale direction, make sure that the needle loop of the test piece Figure 13
is down.
Sandwich it like
1.3) The pulling speed shall be 100 mm / min or 150 mm / min.
Maximum load when tearing in the base direction [Tear strength
]. (N)
Figure− 13
Schematic diagram of mounting a test piece on the grip part of the device
2) Calculation
The warp or wale tear strength and the weft or course tear strength
Calculate the average of each and round it to one decimal place.
At this time, the weft tear strength refers to the case where the weft is cut, and the warp tear strength and the warp cut.
This is the case when it is turned off. The tear strength in the wale direction (course direction) is defined as
Direction). The test conditions shall be added to the test report. However, it was torn
If there is any abnormality in the condition, add it to the test report.
b) A-2 Applies mainly to woolen fabrics, as follows.
Law A-2 Law
1) Clause6 From the sample adjusted in the above, a test piece of about 75 mm × 200 mm was set in the vertical and horizontal directions.
procedure
Collect five samples each, make a cut of 80 mm at right angles to the short side in the center of the short side, and use a clamp with a width of
Using a tensile tester with a self-recording device with FigureLike
13 each
Grab the tongue and pinch it at a right angle. The pulling speed shall be 50 mm / min.
Continue the measurement for 60 seconds from the location.
2) Weft tear strength and warp tear strength are expressed by any of the following. At this time, weft tearing
Calculation
The strength refers to the case where the weft is cut, and the warp tear strength refers to the case where the warp is cut.
2.1) 5 Average of local maximaDivide by 5 at intervals of 12.5 mm from the point excluding 5 mm from the first maximum point
Find the maximum of each equal point and calculate the average of the five points.
2.2) It is determined by the following equation.
Average value by integrator
X ×W
Ts =
K
28
L 1096： 2010
here, Ts: Tear strength (N)

X : Integrator reading
W : Full scale load (N)
K : The input of the integrator is constant and the shake of the recorder pen is full scale
Is the constant given by the integrator reading after 60 seconds when
2.3) Median load (median peak load) Crosshead from 5 mm from first maxima
Count and mark the number of maxima during the 50 mm travel. Peaks up and down exactly on the chart paper
Move the transparent scale parallel to the horizontal axis (time) until it is in minutes. At that time, the vertical axis (load)
The position is defined as the median load.
8.17.2 B Method (double tongue method)
B Law
Applies mainly to textiles, as follows:
a) procedure
Clause6 From the sample adjusted by the method described above, a test specimen of approximately 150 mm × 180 mm was set in the ver
Three samples were takenFig. each,
Make a 100 mm cut at right angles to the side where the short side is divided into three equal parts, as in
14
Using a tensile tester with a clamp of 150 mm or more, with the distance between the
Hold the central tongue of the test piece at the right angle and the outer tongue at the other grip at right angles to the clamp. The pulling speed is
Or tear in the vertical and horizontal directions, leaving a length of 25 mm at 200 mm / min, indicated at that time
Maximum load [Tear strength
]. (N)
Unit: mm
Fig. 14
− Preparation of test pieces
b) Calculate the average of the weft tear strength (N) and the warp tear strength (N), and
Calculation
Round to digits. The tensile speed used shall be added to the test report. At this time, the weft tear strength is
It refers to the case where the warp yarn is cut, and the warp tear strength refers to the case where the warp yarn is cut. However, it is torn
8.17.3 C Method (trapezoid method)
Applies mainly to textiles, as follows:
C Law
a) procedure
Clause6 From the sample adjusted by the above, a test specimen of 75 mm × about 150 mm was vertically and horizontally oriented.
Fig.
Three samples each were taken and 15
placed
Mark
on athe
trapezoidal
test piece.mark as shown in the figure, and center the short side of this mark at right angles to t
10 scored in mm, using a tensile tester with a clamp over the width 75 mm, a chuck distance of the specimen
Along the dotted line). The pulling speed is 150 mm / min
Fig. (15
and 25 mm, isosceles trapezoid mark
Or 200 mm / min, and the maximum load when tearing in the vertical and horizontal directions
(Tear strength)
[ (N) ]
measure.
29
L 1096： 2010
Unit: mm
Fig. 15
− Preparation of test pieces
b) Calculate the average value of the weft tear strength and the warp tear strength (N), and calculate one digit after the decimal point.
Calculation
Round. At this time, the weft tear strength refers to the case where the weft is cut, and the warp tear strength and the warp yarn
Is cut off. The tensile speed used shall be added to the test report. However, in a torn state
If any abnormality is found, add it to the test report.
8.17.4 D Method (pendulum method)
Is applied mainly to textiles, as follows.
D Law
a) Clause6 From the sample adjusted by the method described above, a test specimen 63 mm × about 100 mm
procedure
FigureElmendorf-type
Collect 5 pieces each in the wale direction and the course direction. 16 tear tester such as
Use the to clamp the test piece between the grips (the needle loop is down when the knitted test piece is in the wale direction)
So sandwich). Make a 20 mm square cut at the center of both grips of the test piece and set the remaining 43 mm vertically.
Load strength (tear strength) when tearing in the weft direction, wale direction and course direction (N)
3)
You. However, when there is an abnormality in the torn state
Shall be added to the test report. Examples of additional terms
ToTableShown
6 in
3)
note Abnormality in the case of tearing in the direction of the cut means that the tearing direction is pinched.
The guideline shall be a reference when the distance from the extension of the cut on the opposite side is 8 mm or more to the left or ri
30
L 1096： 2010
Figure− 16
Example of Elmendorf tear tester
b) Warp tear strength or wale tear strength and weft tear strength or course tear strength (N)
Calculation
Calculate the average of each and round to 3 significant figures.
At this time, the weft tear strength refers to the case where the weft is cut, and the warp tear strength and the warp are cut.
This is the case. The tear strength in the wale direction (course direction) is defined as
In the direction of the arrow).
− Examples
Table 6 of terms added to test reports (reference)
Examples of abnormal conditions Examples of additional terms
1 How to cut perpendicular to the direction of the cut Cut at right angles to the tearing direction (○○ N or more)
2 How to cut obliquely to the direction of the cut Cut diagonally to the tearing direction (○○ N or more)
ThreeHow to cut several centimeters in the clamp without cutting to
Left
theuncut
end (○○ N or more)
4 When the thread of the test cloth slips through The specified sample width was not cut due to slippage
(○○ N or more)
NOTE XXN basically reports the minimum load (for XX, enter the measured value).
8.17.5 E Method ( ISO pendulum method)

Tear strengthE Law
(ISO pendulum method) Annex L by.
8.18 Burst strength
A Law
Burst strength is (Murren method) , B Law Law
(Constant speed extensionCmethod)
( ISOorMethod).
8.18.1 A Method (Murren-type method)
The (Murren-type method) is mainly applied to knitted fabrics, as follows.
A Law
a) The Murren low-pressure tester shall be as follows.
apparatus
1) Tightening device
The clamping device consists of an upper clamping plate and a lower clamping plate, the test piece being held between two parall
It can be securely tightened. Concentric circles or grooves with a groove pitch of about 1 mm
Spiral, 60 ° V shaped groove, upper clamp plate (clamp ring) and lower clamp plate (rubber diaphragm plate)
Shape and dimensions
as well
Fig. 17 Fig.as 18
Shown in
The diameter of the upper fastening plate is usually 30.5 mm ± 0.3 mm, and the surface
JIS roughness
B 0601 Stipulate
of the fastening surface is
That Rz was 1.6, the deviation of the center point of the plate with the upper and lower clamping shall be ± 0.25 mm. Also, keep the tightenin
31
L 1096： 2010
It is desirable to have a device that can perform

2) Fluid pressurizer The rate of increase of the fluid for applying pressure shall be 98 mL / min ± 4 mL / min.
3) The rubber septum is made of pure rubber rubber with a thickness of 0.84 mm to 0.89 mm without mineral fillers.
Rubber diaphragm
The pressure at which the bulge rises 9.5 mm above the fastening surface shall be 34.3 kPa to 44.1 kPa. This bulging pressure is
It shall be measured before the test is carried out and if it does not fall within the specified range, it shall be replaced by a new one. Sky
If the air is below the rubber septum,Since the measured value fluctuates, before the test orRemove
when changing
air. the diaphragm,
Unit: mm
− Shape and dimensions of upper clamping plate

Fig. 17
NOTE The rubber diaphragm must be rounded at the bottom of the inner circle to prevent the rubber diaphragm from breaking when pressure is applied
Ri, R is, 0.5 mm~3.0 mm is desirable.
Fig. 18
− Shape of lower fastening
・Sizeplate
b) Clause6 Five specimens of approximately 150 mm × 150 mm were sampled from the sample prepared by
procedure
Use a pressure tester or a Mullen-type burst tester with the same or better accuracy, with the surface of the test piece facing up.
And apply a uniform tension so as not to cause wrinkles and sagging.
The strength (kPa) through which the specimen breaks through the test piece and the strength (kPa) of only the rubber diaphragm at the time of b
c) Calculate the burst strength (kPa) by the following formula, calculate the average value, and round to 3 significant figures.
Calculation
Bs = A - B
here, Bs: Burst strength (kPa)
A : Strength at which the rubber diaphragm breaks through the specimen (kPa)
B : Strength of rubber diaphragm alone at break (kPa)
Note Verification of the test equipment is adjusted using standard aluminum. The standard aluminum material
JIS H is
4160 Alloy number 1N30 specified in JIS H 4170 Alloy number 1N90 specified in
It is desirable to have something that can be checked.
32
L 1096： 2010
8.18.2 B Method (constant speed extension method)

B Law
Applies to woven and knitted fabrics, as follows.
a) Clause6 From the sample prepared by the above procedure, five test pieces with a diameter
procedure FigureConstant
of
19aboutspeed
80 mmlike
were collected.
Using an elongation-type rupture tester, apply uniform tension so that wrinkles and sagging do not occur with the back side of the test piece facin
After that, attach it to a clamp with an inner diameter of 44 mm. Next, press the tip with a radius of curvature of 12.5 mm and a diameter of 25 m
Measure the strength (N) with which the push rod penetrates the test piece at a pressure of 100 mm / min using a rod.
b) Calculate the average of the five measurements and round to one decimal place.
Calculation
Unit: mm
Figure− 19
Constant speed extension type burst tester
8.18.3 C Law ( ISO law)

The hydraulic method for measuring burst strength and burst
Annexexpansion
M by. is
8.19 Wear strength and friction discoloration
The wear strength is(Universal form method)
A Law , B Law
(Scott method) , C Law
(Taber method) , D Law
(Accelero
Data method)
, E Law
(Martindale method) or (Uniform type method).
F Law
8.19.1 A Law (Universal Form Law)
Is the following
A Law (Plane method)
A-1 Law , A-2 Law
(Bending method)A-3
or Law
(Crease method).
a) A-1 Method (plane method) Means
A-1 method
elbows, knees, armpits, buttocks (butt) of woven and knitted fabrics
Applied when evaluating flat wear such as
1) Clause6 Five specimens with a diameter of about 120 mm were collected from the sample prepared
procedure Noby
Fig. 20
Put it on the rubber film JIS R 6253 Rubs in multiple directions with the abrasive paper specified in. The friction speed of the test machine w
Times ± 5 times / minute,
The test piece shall make one revolution for 100 times of friction.
Normal pressing load is 4.45 N,
The air pressure is 27.6 kPa. The maximum length, such as the diameter or long side of the hole, is 8 mm ± 1 mm when the test piece is worn.
The end point is when a hole is made. However, even when several threads are left, the bottom is
Point.
Note It is advisable to conduct a preliminary test for each type of dough and predict the end point before testing.
2) Measure
Measurement and the number of times the test piece is pierced, calculate the average of the five times, and round to the nearest integer
calculation
The number and conditions of the abrasive paper are added to the test report.
Note An example of how to select abrasive 7paperin
TableShown
33
L 1096： 2010
Table
− Abrasive
7 paper (reference)
Type of abrasive paper
Weight of fabric sampleKnitted sample mass
Two Two
g/m g/m
Cw-CP 1 200 Less than 250 Less than 250
Cw-CP 800 250 or more and less than 400 250 or more
Cw-CP 400 400 or more or special products −
Fig. 20
− Example of Universal Flat Wear Tester
b) A-2 TheA-2
Method (bending method) wearmethod
strength of knees, elbows and other bent parts when wearing woven garments
Applicable when evaluating friction discoloration, as follows.
1) Wear strength
1.1) procedure
Clause6 From the samples prepared by the method described above, those with a density of 50 pieces / 25.4 mm or more were approxi
For 50 or less than 25.4 mm, 5 specimens of about 40 mm x 200 mm each in the vertical and horizontal directions
Remove approximately the same number of yarns from both sides until they are closest to a width of 25 mm.
Test specimen Fold it in half as shown and attach it to the tester with the bar in between.
Fig. 21
Apply a tensile load (load on the bar) and a pressing load (load in the direction perpendicular to the test piece) of 25 mm
Rub back and forth the distance between. The friction speed of the tester was 125 times / minute ± 5 times / minute.
Always
TableThe
8 test is performed under the following test conditions.
− Example of bending method universal type bending wear tester
Fig. 21
34
L 1096： 2010
Table
− Test
8 condition
Weight per unit area of fabric Tensile load Pressing load
Two
g/m N N
87 or less 8.90 4.45
88-168 13.34 6.67
169-255 17.79 8.90
256-342 22.24 11.12
343-510 26.69 13.34
511 or more 31.14 15.56
1.2) Measurement and calculation

Measure the number of times the test piece was cut, and averaged 5 times each in the vertical and horizontal directions.
Calculate the value and round to an integer. The tensile load and pressing load are added to the test report.
2) Friction discoloration
2.1) Clause6 From the sample prepared by the procedure described above, collect a test piece
procedure Fig. oflike
2125 mm × about 200 mm,
Using a universal bending wear tester, fold and press the fabric so that the front side is rubbed against the bar.
Apply a load of 2.23 N and a tensile load of 4.45 N and rub back and forth 100 times over a distance of 25 mm.
2.2) Takediscoloration
Measurement of friction out the test piece, open the color between the friction surface and the non-friction
JIS L 0804 surface,
Color difference between each color chart of gray scale for discoloration specified inJIS L 0801 In the way
Therefore, it is determined.
c) A-3 Method (folding method)The
A-3 method
main purpose of woven and knitted fabric is to use the sleeve (sleeve) mouth, collar, and pants when wearing c
Applied when evaluating fold wear, as follows.
1) Clause6 From the sample adjusted by the method described above, a test specimen of 25 mm × about 75 mm
procedure
Collect 5 pieces each in the wale direction and the course direction. Fig.
next, 22
Try a fold wear clamp like
After applying a pressing force of 2.23 N or 4.45 N, JIS R 6253 Research specified in
Reciprocating friction in multipleHowever,
directions
One-way
with polishing
reciprocating
paper.friction can be obtained depending on the type of fabric.
− How to install the fold method test piece

Fig. 22
2) Measurement and calculation

Measure the number of times the test piece breaks and determine the vertical and horizontal directions or the wale direction a
Calculate the average of 5 times for each course direction and round to the nearest integer. In addition, the pressing load and the type of abrasi
The direction of friction (unidirectional or multidirectional) and the width of the friction surface of the clamp shall be noted in the test report. O
If the test is performed by friction, the setting direction of the clamp relative to the direction of friction shall also be noted.
8.19.2 B Law (Scott-type method)
B LawIs applied mainly when assessing the abrasion of special textile fabrics.
35
L 1096： 2010
a) procedure
Clause6 From the sample adjusted by the method described above, a test piece of about 30 mm × 120 mm was set in the vertical and horiz
Take five pieces each, and remove approximately the same number of threads from both sides to make a test specimen of 25 mm × about 120 mm
FigureUsing
23 a Scott-type tester as shown in the figure
Reciprocating friction at a distance of 40 mm with a pressing pressure of 9.81 N. The friction speed of the test machine is 120 times / min ± 2
Times / minute. If the pressing load is not 9.81 N, this shall be added to the test report.
Figure− 23
Scott type testing machine
b) Measurement and
Specimen width ismm
calculation 10 Measure the number of times when it cuts by 15 mm. Vertical direction and horizontal direction
Calculate the average of 5 times and round to the nearest integer. However, if the test piece is a coated cloth, stop after 1 000 times.
Therefore, observe the surface condition at that time and add it to the test report.
8.19.3 C Method (Taber-shaped method)
C Law
This method is mainly applied when evaluating the wear strength and friction discoloration of woven fabric, knitted fabric, and special fabric.
by.
a) Wear strength depends on weight loss, thickness reduction, tensile strength reduction, and appearance change.
Wear strength
1) Before starting the test, insert the sample holder into the
Preparation JIS R 6251 Alumina specified in
A quality P400 is installed, and the surface is regenerated by running the worn wheel about 15 times.
2) procedure
Clause6 Five circular test specimens with a diameter of about 130 mm were collected from the sample prepared by
Drill a hole about 6 mm in the center,Fig. 24
Using the Taber abrasion tester shown in Fig.
Attach on the rubber mat of the sample holder. Then, usually,TablePut
9 the abrasion wheel on the specimen about 70 times
Friction in rotation per minute.
36
L 1096： 2010
Fig. 24
− Example of Taber abrasion tester
− Test
Table 9 condition
Fabric type mass Wear wheel load
Two
g/m No. N
fabric 180 or less CS-10 2.45
More than 180 and less than 500 CS-10 4.90
More than 500 CS-17 9.81
knitting − CS-10 2.45
3) The
Measurement and measurement shall be made by one of the following methods and shall indicate the wear strength. The number of friction
calculation
Use 300 times or 500 times (predetermined times) suitable for the type of dough. Also, wear wheel No., load
The weight (N) and the number of times of friction are added to the test report.
3.1) Weight loss Weight loss is determined by measuring the weight (mg) after rubbing a specified number of times and calculating the weight l
Calculate the average value of 5 times and round to the nearest integer.
Wl = W - W '
here, Wl : Weight loss (mg)
W : Mass before friction (mg)
W ' : Mass after predetermined number of friction (mg)
3.2) Thickness reduction rate reduction rate is measured by measuring the thickness (mm) after rubbing a specified number of times, and the r
The thickness
Using the formula, calculate the average value of 5 times, and round it to one decimal place.
T −T
TL = c a ×100
Tc
here, TL: Thickness reduction rate (%)
Tc : Thickness of original cloth (mm)
Ta : Thickness after a specified number of rubs (mm)
3.3) The tensile
Tensile strength reduction ratestrength reduction rate mainly applies to textiles. Approximate width from the test piece after rubbing a specif
Take a test piece 30 mm long and about 60 mm long, and put it on both sides until it becomes 25 mm wide so that it can be used for the tensi
Approximately the same number of yarns are removed from the sample, and the tensile strength (N) is measured at a gripping interval of 25
Calculate the rate of decrease (%), calculate the average value of 5 times, and round it to one decimal place. However, the tensile speed
37
L 1096： 2010
It shall be added to the test results.

S −S
SL = a × 100
Sa
here, S L: Reduction rate of tensile strength (%)
Sa : Tensile strength of original fabric (N)
S : Tensile strength after rubbing a specified number of times (N)
3.4) Change in appearance
Judgment of change in appearance is mainly applied to textiles. Observe the appearance after rubbing a specified number of time
Judge.
Class A No abnormality Class
B Slightly damaged Class
C Vertical or horizontal cut
b) Friction discoloration
1) Step a) Collect three test pieces in the same manner as in
Attach. Next, wear wheel No. CS-10 was placed on the test piece, and the woven fabric had a pressing load of 2.49 N and the knitted fabric ha
Rub 100 times with heavy 2.45 N.
2) Take
Measurement and out the test piece, open the color between the friction surface and the non-friction
calculation JIS L 0804 surface,
To
Compare with the specified color gap between color charts JIS L 0801 By the method of
Judgment.
8.19.4 D Act (Accelerator rotor method)
Is applied to the evaluation of the wear strength of fabrics and knits against the naturally applied weak friction at all times, according to:
D Law
a) Clause6 Three specimens of 110 mm × 110 mm were sampled from the sample prepared by
procedure
The end yarns on the sides were fixed with an adhesive, and in the case of woven fabrics, the inner yarn from each side was loosened by about 3
Then, fix the four end yarns with adhesive. Then weigh the standard mass A (g). Next, the test piece Figure 25
Fold like FigureBetween
26 the rotating blades of the accelerator rotor type abrasion tester shown in (1). Rotating blades
Rotate at a speed of about 3 000 times / minute for 5 minutes. In this case, the abrasive paper to be attached JIS
to the inner wall of the cylinder of th
R 6253 Use those specified in.
Figure− 25
How to make test pieces
38
L 1096： 2010
Figure− 26
Example of Accelerator rotor type wear tester
b) Excluding
Measurement and fiber waste deposited on the surface of the test piece or between the yarns of the test piece, weigh the standard weigh
calculation
Calculate the mass reduction rate (%) using the following formula, calculate the average of the three measurements, and round to one decimal pl
The number of the abrasive paper and the type of rotating blade used (S type or flat type) shall be added to the test report.
A− B
Lm = ×100
A
here, Lm : Weight loss rate (%)
A : Weight before wear (g)
B : Weight after wear (g)
8.19.5 E Method (Martindale method)
This test is mainly used to evaluate the abrasion strength, discoloration and discoloration due to abrasion, and appearance changes of woven o
E Law
Apply, as follows.
a) Preparation and mounting of Clause6 Four specimens with a diameter of 38 mm were collected from the sample prepared by
test pieces
Two
The FigureAttach
27 it to the sample holder of the Martindale abrasion tester shown
However,
in (1).Fabric weight 500 g / m
For the following samples (excluding laminated fabrics)
) And knitted fabric are polyurethane foam on the back of the test piece.
Three
(Apparent density 0.03 g, About
/ cm 3 mm thick) and attach them to the sample holder. Next,
Two Two
Unit mass 750 g / m± 50 g / m， On a 3 mm thick woven felt Table Lay
10 and attach the standard friction cloth shown in
Put it on the friction table Table A11pressing load shown in FIG.
Figure− 27
Example of Martindale wear tester
39
L 1096： 2010
Table−10
Standard friction cloth
item Freshly Yoko
Fiber type hair hair
Yarn fineness tex R63 tex / 2 R74 tex / 2
density Book / cm 17 12
Number / m S450 ± 20 / Z540 ± 20 S350 ± 20 / Z500 ± 20
μm
Average fiber diameter 27.5 ± 2 29.0 ± 2
Two 215
Mass per unit area in standard condition g / m
Replacement frequency a) Change each time each test is completed.
b) 1 If the number of tests is 50 000 or more,
Replace every 50 000 times.
Table−11
Test condition
Fabric applications Pressing load kPa
For clothing 9.0 ± 0.2
Furniture, carpet, etc. 12.0 ± 0.3
b) Counter
operation Set the spare set counter to an appropriate number of times of friction (for example, 5 000 times).
Then, start the machine and rub in multiple directions. After the preset number of frictions has been reached, the specimen is examined and
Thereafter, it is determined each time the operation is stopped. If the end point approaches, reduce the number of continuous friction. test
If pills are formed on the test piece, carefully examine only the fiber exposed on the surface of the test piece with sharp scissors or a razor.
cut out.
Replace when the woven felt is worn, when both sides become dirty, or after 25 tests have been completed.
The determination of the endpoint is as follows.
1) The end point for woven fabric is when two or more yarns of the test piece break, and for knitted fabric the test piece
Thread break
Is worn and punctured.
2) Discoloration
The endpoint is the degree of discoloration of the
JISspecimen.
L 0804 Specified gray scale for discoloration
When it becomes equivalent to No. 3.
3) Endpoints are marked changes in the appearance of the test piece, eg, loss of nap, loops of Boucle thread
Change in appearance
Loss of the fancy thread or the effect of the fancy thread.
c) , b) 2) Orb) 1)b) 3) Test each method as needed and count the number of times to the endpoint.
Measurement and calculation
Measure and calculate the average of each of the four measurements, and represent the result in units of 100.
8.19.6 F Law (uniform form method)
Is mainly applied to the evaluation of wear on the elbows, knees, inside and (crotch) of the knitted fabric.
F Law
a) Wear strength
1) F-1 Method (steel blade method)
1.1) Standard procedure Clause Figureprepared by
6 Five specimens with a diameter of about 70 mm were collected from the sample
28 Using a uniform-type abrasion tester such as the one shown in Fig. 1, the friction surface was mounted on a sample mount with a diamete
Apply a uniform tension to the specimen with a tensile load of N or 22.3 N. Spring steel bray for friction element
The test piece is rubbed in multiple directions with a pressing force of 22.3 N or 44.5 N.
The rotation speed of the spring steel blade of the abrasion tester was 238 times / minute ± 5 times / minute.
40
L 1096： 2010
The rotation speed of the table shall be 250 times / minute ± 5 times / minute.
1.2) Procedure in wet condition
Five test specimens with a diameter of about 70 mm were collected, and the test specimens were immersed in water at
After wetting enough,1.1) Perform the same operation as the standard procedure. However, a trial was carried out every 1
With the test piece attached to the sample mount, water is dropped on the test piece with a dropper.
2) F-2 Is a) 1) F-2
Method (polishing paper method) of 1.1) The same operation method as described above is used. However, the friction elemen
F-1 method
Law
On a flatJIS
plate
R 6253 The test piece was rubbed in multiple directions with a pressing load of 4.45 N using the abrasive paper specified in
I do. Change the abrasive paper every time. The number of the abrasive paper shall be added to the test report.
Note It is desirable to use it together with visual inspection because some yarns may remain and the stop device may not operate.
3) The number of times when the test piece is worn out, pierced and the machine stopped is measured.
Measurement
Calculate the average value of 5 times and round to the nearest integer. The test conditions shall be added to the test report.
Four)Calculation
Unit: mm
Figure− 28
Main part of uniform type abrasion tester
b) Friction discoloration
1) procedure
Friction discoloration 6 Three round test pieces with a diameter of about 100 mm
And FigureUsing
28 a uniform type abrasion tester such as the one shown above, the surface of the
Install it face up. Next, a spring steel blade was used as the friction element, and a 4.45 N pressing load was applied.
The specimen is rubbed 100 times in multiple directions with heavy weight. However, the rotation of the spring steel blade of the abrasion test
The speed was about 64 times / minute, the rotation of the sample mount was about 62 times / minute, and the friction element was a spring st
If not, add it to the test report.
2) Take
Measurement and out the test piece, open the color between the friction surface and the non-friction
calculation JIS L 0804surface,
To
Compare the difference in color seen between each color chart of the prescribedJIS
gray
L scale
0801 for
Is determined
discoloration.
by
41
L 1096： 2010
Expressed as the average of three measurements.

8.20 Compression rate and compression modulus
The compressibility and elastic modulus are as follows.
a) The compressibility and compressive
procedure 6 From
modulus
the sample
are specified
prepared
in clause
as described above, a test piece of approximately 50 mm × 50 mm
Samples shall be taken, and three test pieces shall be placed in the vertical or wale direction and the horizontal or course direction using a compr
Overlap so that the directions intersect at right Table
angles 12
alternately, Table of
Measure the thickness (mm) under the standard pressure 12
Hold for 1 minute under a constant pressure and measure the thickness (mm). Next, after leaving the applied pressure for 1 minute,
Measure the thickness (mm) again under standard pressure. Thick and brushed items can be measured with a single sheet. However,
Two
The area of the indenter for the test of the product
And is usually 50 mm.
If a different number, pressure, or area of the pressurizer is used, this shall be added to the test report.
Table−12
Standard pressure table
Woven kPa Knit kPa
Standard pressure 4.9 0.7
Standard pressure for bulky and wool fabrics 0.196 −
Standard pressure of hair knitted fabric − 0.3
Constant pressure 29.4 19.6
b) Calculate the compression ratio (%) and compression elastic modulus (%) by the following formula, calculate the average value of 5 time
Calculation
Confuse.
T0 − T1
Cr = ×100
T0
T0′ − T1
Ce = ×100
T0 − T1
here, Cr : Compression rate (%)

Ce : Compression modulus (%)
T0: Thickness when standard pressure is applied (mm)
T1: Thickness (mm) after applying constant pressure and holding for 1 minute
T 0' : Thickness under standard pressure after standing for 1 minute (mm), excluding pressure
8.21 Softness
The softnessAisLaw
(45 ° cantilever method) , B Law
(Slide method) , C Law
(Clark method) , D Law
(Heart loop
, E Law
Law) (Handle ometer method) , F Law
(Handling tester method) or G Law
(Drape coefficient method).
8.21.1 A Method ( 45 ° cantilever method)
(45 ° cantilever method) is as follows.
A Law
a) Procedure Is
A amethod
clause 6 From the sample adjusted by the method described above, place a test piece of 20 mm × 150 mm in the vertical and hori
Direction, or wale direction and course direction. FigureAlso
29 has a 45 ° slope at one end
The short side of the test piece is placed on a horizontal surface of a smooth surface with the scale base line. Then, in an appropriate manner
Gently slide the test piece in the direction of the slope, and when the center point of one end of the test piece contacts
The scale is read on a scale. The bending resistance is indicated by the length (mm) that the test piece has moved.
Measure the back.
42
L 1096： 2010
Figure− 29
45° Example of cantilever type testing machine
b) Calculate the average value of the vertical direction and the horizontal direction or the wale direction and the course direction,
Calculation
Round.
8.21.2 B Method (slide method)
B Law
(Slide method) is as follows.
a) Procedure Is
B amethod
clause6 From the sample adjusted by 8.3.2 Per unit area in standard condition
Two
Weight (g / cm
), And then place a 20 mm × 150 mm test specimen in the vertical and horizontal directions or the wale direction.
And 5 samples each in the course direction. First, use the test equipment shown in
Fig. 30
The specimens and weights are mounted on top of them so that they match. Weight is on the test piece
Place the tester slightly out of the boundary between the tester main body and the moving table toward the moving table. Next, turn the handle g
To lower the carriage and move the free end of the test piece away from theδcarriage.
Read the value of by the scale.
Fig. 30
− Example of slide type testing machine
b) Calculate the rigidity (mNcm) using the following formula, measure each of the five sides, and set the vertical and vertical directions.
Calculation
43
L 1096： 2010
Calculate the average value in this direction, wale direction and course direction, and round to one decimal place.
WLFour
Br =
8δ
here, Br : Softness (mNcm)
Two
W : Gravity per unit area of test piece (mN / cm )
L : Length of test piece (cm)
δ: Scale reading (cm)
Note The bending resistance by the sliding method is expressed as the bending moment with respect to the unit curvature for the unit width o
Is done.
8.21.3 C Law (Clark Law)
(Clark method) is as follows.
C Law
a) Is a clause6 20 mm x 150
Step C method mm~ 250 mm test piece in vertical direction and
Collect 5 samples each in the horizontal direction, the wale direction andFigure
the course
Use
31 the
direction,
Clark type tester shown in
The test piece is sandwiched between two rollers. Next, turn the handle to the left and right to adjust the angle at which the test piece falls to the
The length is adjusted so that the sum of the left and right angles indicated on the scale plate is 90 ° ± 2 °, and the length at that time (mm)
Measure
Unit: mm
Figure− 31
Example of Clark type testing machine
b) Calculate the average of the vertical and horizontal directions or the wale and course directions five times each, and calculate the integer.
Calculation
Round to the top.
8.21.4 D Method (heart loop method)
D Law
Applies to relatively soft woven and knitted fabrics, as follows.
a) procedure
Clause6 From the sample adjusted by the method, a test piece of 20 mm × about 250 mm is set in the vertical and horizontal directions,
For the wale direction and the course direction, collect 10 pieces each. Put the test piece on the grip of the horizontal bar like
Fig. 32
Attach it in a heart loop so that the effective length of the test piece is 200 mm. Then, after one minute
Measure the distance L (mm) between the top of the horizontal bar and the lowest point of the loop .
44
L 1096： 2010
Fig. 32
− Example of mounting test specimen
b) The stiffness is indicated by L, and is measured on the front and back of each of 10 sheets, and the vertical and horizontal directions, or th
Calculation
Calculate the average value in each of the rule direction and the course direction, and round to the nearest integer.
8.21.5 E Method (handle ometer method)
E Law
(Handwheel method) is as follows.
a) Procedure Is
E amethod
clause6 Three 200 mm x 200 mm test pieces were collected from the sample prepared Figure
by To33
Place the specimen on the sample table shown so that the measurement direction is perpendicular to the slot (20 mm). Next, the sample table
Lower the blade, adjusted to 8 mm below the surface, and press the specimen.
A specimen of 200 mm x 200 mm or less (25 mm x 25 mm or more) may be used depending on the properties of the sample. Also,
It can be measured with a slot width of 5 mm or 10 mm. In this case, the test conditions shall be attached to the test report.
Write.
Figure− 33
Example of handle-o-meter type testing machine
b) The measurement shall be made at 67 mm (1/3 of the test width) from either side, in the vertical and horizontal directions, or
Measurement
Is for the different parts of the wale and course directions FigurePerform
34 in the order of the numbers shown in
Read the highest value (N) indicated by the indicator.
45
L 1096： 2010
c) Calculation
Calculate the average of three times by calculating the sum of the highest values of the four sides, and round it to one decimal place.
Unit: mm
Figure− 34
Measuring method
8.21.6 F Method (handling tester method)

F Law
(Handling tester method) is as follows.
a) Procedure Is
F amethod
clause 6 Take three 200 mm diameter circular test specimens from the sample prepared in the above procedure. test
The thickness8.4
ofAfter
the piece
measuring by Table Select
13 a ring according to the specifications and on
attach
the8it
other
mm
to the
diameter
hand,
testing machine.
Attach a metal ball to the back of the center of the test piece, and make sure that the test piece does not touch
Attach to the testing machine. Next, the ring is lowered at a speed of 300 mm / min.
Find the maximum load (N) (read down to the minimum
) Thisscale).
is repeated three times for each test piece. Also,
If the thickness of the test piece is 2.00 mm or more, a test piece with a diameter of 150 mm shall be collected and the refill shall be 0.5 to 1.0.
The test shall be performed using a ring. If the mass of the sample influences, it shall be 30 mm x 30 mm.
Table−13
Ring type
Unit: mm
Specimen thickness Inner diameter of the ring
~ 0.12 10
0.13 to 0.28 15
0.29 to 0.50 20
0.51 to 0.78 25
0.79 to 1.12 30
1.13 to 1.53 35
1.54 to 2.00 40
b) Calculation
The average value of the three times is calculated, the drawing resistance (N) is calculated by the following equation, and the average val
Round to one decimal place.
× D ×L
Four
P=
d Two
W
Pr =
P
here, P : fulfillment
Pr : Service resistance (N)
46
L 1096： 2010
W : Penetration load (N)

D : diameter of test piece (mm)
d : Inner diameter of ring (mm)
L : Test specimen thickness (mm)
8.21.7 G Method (drape coefficient method)
(Drape coefficient method) is as follows.
G Law
a) Procedure Is
G amethod
clause 6 Five specimens of 254 mm in diameter were collected from the sample prepared in
Drill a hole about 10 mm in the center of the piece. Next, with the measurement surface
Figureof
Drapes
the test
35 shown
piece facing up
Placed on a sample stage (127 mm in diameter), fixed by the sample holder, and vibrated the sample stage up and down three times.
After leaving for 1 minute, measure the drape shape area on both sides of the specimen.
Unit: mm
Figure− 35
Drape tester example
b) Calculation
Calculate the drape coefficient by the following formula, calculate the average value of the front and back sides, and round to three decim
Ad − S1
Df =
− S1
S Two
here, Df : Drape coefficient
Two
Ad: Vertical projection area of test piece (Drape shape area)
(Mm )
Two
S 1: Area of sample stage (mm)
Two
S Two
: Area of sample (mm )
8.22 Bending resilience
A LawHardness
The bending resilience is , B Law
(Gurley method) (Bending method) or C Law
(Loop compression method).
8.22.1 A Method Hardness (Gurley method)
A LawThe bending resistance (Gurley method) is mainly applied to hard fabrics, and is as follows.
a) Sample collectionClause
6 From the sample prepared in the above, a test piece of length L mm and width d mm
Collect 5 samples in each direction. Normally, the standard dimensions of test specimens are 89 mm long and 25 mm wide. However
Combine dimensions such as 25 mm, 38 mm, 114 mm, 13 mm, and 51 mm in width to obtain appropriate values.
47
L 1096： 2010
Let
b) operation
1) as well
Preparation Figure as Using
Figure
36 37 a Gurley type testing machine as shown in
Fix the chuck to one of the scales 1, 1.5 and 2 (L / 25.4) on the
Move to a position away from the vertex of B. Next, load mounting holes a, b and c below the fulcrum of pendulum B
Weight W to obtain an appropriate value for
a (G) , W b (G) and W (G) alone or in combination
c
To a vertical position without vibration. Weights include 5, 25, 50, and 200 g.
2) Move the movable arm to the right or left at a constant speed of 2 times / min. The lower part of the test piece is on pendulum B
operation
Read the scale RG when touching and leaving pendulum B. The bending resistance was measured on the front and back of each of five test pie
You.
Figure− 36
Example of Gurley type testing machine Figure− 37
Main part of Gurley type testing machine
c) Calculate the average value of the vertical direction and the horizontal direction five times, and calculate the bending resilience by the fol
Calculation
Round to one decimal place.
L − 12.7 )Two
Br = RG × (aWa + bWb + cWc )×(
−
.375 ×TenFive
× Three
d
here, Br: Softness (mN)
RG : Scale when the test piece separates from pendulum B
a , b , c : Distance between load mounting hole and fulcrum (mm)
Wa , Wb, Wc : Weight of the weight attached to the load mounting hole (g)
L : Length of test piece (mm)
d : Width of test piece (mm)
8.22.2 B Law (bending method)
B Law
(Bending method) is mainly applied to the evaluation of hard fabrics, and is as follows.
a) Clause6 From the sample prepared in the above step, place a 25 mm × 50 mm specimen in the vertical and horizontal directions, respectiv
procedure
10 samples were collected.
FigureWhen
38 the test piece is bent at a predetermined deflection angle using an Olsen-type testing machine such as
Read the scale and calculate the bending moment (Ncm) using the following formula. Usually, the prescribed deflection angle is 30 °
Or 60 ° and the angle used shall be noted in the test report.
48
L 1096： 2010
Figure− 38
Examples of main parts of Olsen type testing machine
b) Calculate the average value of 10 sheets in the vertical and horizontal directions, and round to one decimal place.
Calculation
M0 × M
Bf =
100
here, Bf: Bending moment (N · cm)
M0: Pendulum moment at 100% load scale (Ncm)
M : Load scale reading
Note To find the bending stiffness (Pa), JIS K 7106 Please refer to. Generally called Olsen bending test
Have been broken.
8.22.3 C Method (loop compression method)
C Law
(Loop compression method) is as follows.
a) Is a clause
Preparation of test piece 6 From the sample adjusted by
C method
Collect 5 samples each in the horizontal
Figuredirection,
Mark
39 5mm on both sides as shown in Mark spacing 40 mm
And
Unit: mm
Figure− 39
Specimen dimensions
49
L 1096： 2010
b) operation Figuredevice,
To a tensile tester with a self-recording 40 a device for loop compression as shown in
Attach
Set conditions.
− Head speed: 50 mm / min
− Chart speed: 500 mm / min
−L 1 ： 20 mm
−L Two : 5 mm
Hold the 5 mm ends of the test piece between Figure) And
41 the center line of the test piece coincide.
On the compression load cell table. next, Fig. 40 a)Like L 1 (20 mm)
And the distance between the pressure
(Fig. element
Likeand
40 b) L (5 mm), then return to the original position
Two
do it FigureDraw
42 a one-cycle hysteresis curve as shown below, and calculate the loop hardness (mN) and
Find the rebound rate (%).
Unit: mm
Figure− 40
Example of loop compression device
Unit: mm
NOTE The tip is finished with sandpaper so that the blade is dropped.
of.
Figure− 41
Example of pressure element
50
L 1096： 2010
Figure− 42
Hysteresis curve
c) Calculation
Calculate the average of 5 times each in the vertical and horizontal directions, and round to one decimal place.
Lh = BB′
D C′
Lr = × 100
CC′
(AC′ = C′B′ )
here, Lh: Loop hardness (mN)
Lr : Loop rebound rate (%)
BB´: FigureOf42BB A
' verage load (mN)
DC ′ : FigureOf42DC A' verage load (mN)
CC′ : FigureOf42CC A' verage load (mN)
8.23 Sliding resistance
The slip resistance is applied to the fabric and is determined by the seam slip method, thread pull method or pin hook method.
8.23.1 Seam sliding method
The seam slippage Law
, B Law
A method , C Law
Or D Law
And the following.
a) A Law
1) Is a clause
Test specimen preparation 6 From
method A the sample prepared by the above, set up a test piece of about 55 mm × 260 mm.
Take three pieces each in the horizontal direction and the horizontal direction, and remove approximately the same number of threads from bo
I do. The test piece was folded in half with the table facing inside and sewn 30 mm from the end of the fold under the following conditions.
After combining, cut the fold.
To prevent pull-in of the sewing thread at the start or end of sewing that occurs during the test, a width of about 20 mm ×
About 150 mm longJIS L 0803 Attached white cloth / cotton No. 3-1Figure
specified
Between
43 in two folded test pieces
And sew together.
1.1) Stitch type The stitch type is lockstitch.
1.2) Number The
of stitches
number of stitches shall be 5 stitches / cm.
1.3) The type
Type and fineness of sewing and fineness of the
thread JISsewing
L 2511thread
Polyester filament hand specified in
51
L 1096： 2010
78 dtex of sewing thread x 3 [♯50 (3 codes)

].
1.4) Sewing needle type
The type of sewing needle is normal needle 11.
Unit: mm
Figure− 43
Preparation of test pieces
2) Using a tensile tester, hold the test specimen with the test piece open at a grip distance of 100 mm, and grab at 50 mm / min.
operation
After applying a load of 147.1 N at a pulling speed of, remove the test piece from the grip and hold for 1 hour.
Apply a load (approximately 4.90 N / 25.4 mm to 9.81 N / 25.4 mm) at the right angle to the seam to eliminate the sag.
Measure the maximum pore size of the slip to the nearest 0.1 mm. However, the specimen was cut with a load of less than 147.1 N
In such case, the load (N) shall be 2/3 of the cutting load, and the load used shall be added to the test report. In addition, sliding
3) The average value of the vertical direction and the horizontal direction
Calculation Round to was
one calculated
decimal place.
three times
However,
for each,
Sliding in the warp direction refers to sliding of the weft on the warp yarn, and sliding in the weft direction refers to the sliding of the warp on
Refers to slippage.
b) B Law
1) Is a clause
Preparation of test piece 6 Approximately 100 mm × 170 mm test piece from the sample prepared by
B method
Collect 5 pieces each in the horizontal and horizontal directions. Fold the test piece in half, cut the fold
And Figure1044mm from the cut end Stitch under the same conditions as above. However,
A Law
The sewing conditions may be changed to appropriate ones according to the purpose. In this case, it shall be added to the test report.
Unit: mm
Figure− 44
Preparation of test pieces
52
L 1096： 2010
2) operation
Using a tensile tester, grab the sample at a grip distance of 76.2 mm and a tensile speed of 300 mm / min.
49.0 N for thin fabrics (such as blouses) and 117.7 N for thick fabrics (such as slacks).
After removing the test piece from the grip, hold it for 1 hour and apply a load (approximately 4.90
N / 25.4 mm to 9.81 N / 25.4 mm) in the direction perpendicular to the seam, and set the maximum hole size of the seam slip to 0.1 mm.
Measure up to the unit.
The tensile speed (100 mm / min) and / or the load may be changed according to the application or purpose. changed
In this case, it shall be added to the test report. If there is any abnormality in the slipping state, it shall be added to the test report. Attached
Examples of terms to writeShown
Table 14 in
3) The size of the seam slip is FigureLike
Calculation 45 a + a ' Value. 5 times each in vertical and horizontal directions
Calculate the average of and round to one decimal place.
However, the sliding in the warp direction refers to the sliding of the weft on the warp yarn, and the sliding in the weft direction refers to the
The slippage of warp yarn.
Figure− 45
Measurement point of maximum seam hole
Table−14
Examples of terms added to test reports (reference)
Examples of abnormal conditions
Examples of additional terms
1 Complete slippage under set loadComplete slippage at ○○ N
Two Fabric breakage under set load ○○ N breaks the fabric
Three
Sewing thread cutting below the set
Thread
load cutting with ○○ N
NOTE OON basically reports the minimum load (
Is the measurement value)
.
c) C Is applied
Method C methodmainly to thin filament fabrics, as follows.
1) Clause
Preparation of test 6 From the sample adjusted by the procedure described above, place a test piece of
specimen
Collect 5 samples each in this direction. In the length direction, the length from the fold to one end is about 100 mm.
Fold in parallel to the cloth. Next, the normal needle 11 at 13 mm from the fold JIS L 2101 Cotton
Sewing thread No. 60 (3 cords) No. 60 white mercerized thread, 14 stitches per 25.4 mm
I will. At this time, adjustment is made so that the tension between the upper thread and the lower thread becomes uniform. Then cut the fold.
Prepare 5 specimens with seams perpendicular to the horizontal direction and 5 specimens with seams perpendicular to the vertical direction.
I do.
2) Operation 8.14.1ofb)B Law
Using a tensile tester with a self-recording device by the grab method,
53
L 1096： 2010
Under an initial load of 1.67 N with a gripping distance of 76 mm, the end near the seam of the test piece should be
And the seam is positioned so that the seam is located at the center between the grips.
Draw. Next, grip the same test piece so that the end far from the seam (opposite end) is located on the upper grip.
Under the same conditions, draw the load-elongation curve of the unsealed portion.
3) Thecalculation
Measurement and two load-elongation curves areFigureSo46that they pass through the same origin at the same coordinates as shown in
Find the interval between the two curves when the overlap and load are 4.90 N, and use this as the correction value. 6 mm slippage for this cor
The difference in elongation plus the distance corresponding to is found on the same vertical coordinate of the two curves. From foot D at this
The value obtained by subtracting the load of 4.90 N to obtain the correction value from the obtained load (N) is calculated for the width per 2
The resistance required for a 6 mm slip. Calculate the average of 5 times each in the vertical and horizontal directions,
Round to the next single digit. The resistance at the time of any slippage shall be determined in accordance with the above. However, the verti
Sliding refers to the sliding of the weft on the warp, and weft sliding refers to the sliding of the warp on the weft.
Figure− 46
Load-elongation curve
d) D Applies
Method D methodmainly to woolen fabrics, as follows.
1) Preparation of test specimen
Clause6 Approximately 175 mm × 105 mm test piece from the sample adjusted by
Take three pieces in each direction and remove approximately the same number of threads from both sides along the long side to make the wid
Fold the test piece in half with the table facing inside and sew it at 13 mm from the end of the fold under the following conditions.
Cut the fold ( Figurereference)
47 .
1.1) The sewing machine is an electric single-needle lockstitch sewing machine that can sew 700 to 1 000 stitches per minute.
sewing machine
1.2) Number The
of stitches
number of stitches shall be 14 stitches / 25.4 mm.
1.3) Sewing needle and thread type
The types of sewing needle and Table
threadIt15shall be based on.
Table−15
Sewing needle and thread type
Two
Textile mass g / m Sewing needle diameter mm Sewing thread
140 or less 0.75 (standard needle 11) JIS L 2101 Cotton sewing thread ♯60 (3 codes)
140 or more 0.90 (normal needle 14) JIS L 2101 Cotton sewing thread ♯40 (3 codes)
54
L 1096： 2010
Unit: mm
Figure− 47
Test pieces
2) Tensile test where one of the grips is 25 mm x 25 mm and the other is 25 mm x 40 mm or more
operation
With a gripping interval of 75 mm and a pulling speed of 50 mm per minute.
Table Until
16 the load of
At that time, set the distance between both ends of the point where the seam is most open at right angles to the seam in the vertical and horizonta
Measure Figurereference)
48 .
Table−16
Applied load
Two
Fabric type g / m Load to be applied N
78.45
Textile for clothing with a mass of 140 or less
Apparel fabrics with mass over 140 117.68
Furniture, carpet etc. 176.52
Figure− 48
Maximum seam opening
55
L 1096： 2010
3) Calculation
Calculate the average of the three rounds and round to one decimal place. However, sliding in the warp direction means a warp
The slippage of the upper weft yarn, and the slippage in the weft direction, mean the slippage of the warp yarn on the weft yarn.
8.23.2 Thread pulling method
The thread pulling method isOas
A Law r follows.
B LawAnd the following.
a) A Is JIS L 1062 of 7.2 [ B Law
Law A Law (Thread pulling ]by.
method)
b) B Law
1) Preparation of test piece B method
Is a clause 6 From the sample adjusted by the above, set the test piece of 30 mm x 300 mm in the vertical direction,
Take three pieces each in the horizontal direction, remove the same number of threads from both ends, and make a 25 mm × 300 mm test piece
The Fig. 49
Insert the sewing needle at a right angle toward the long side at a position about 125 mm from the end as shown in
Cut the numbered thread, insert the sewing needle in the same manner at a distance of 50 mm from that point to the other end, and cut the even
Disconnect.
Unit: mm
Fig. 49
− Test pieces
2) Using a tensile tester 8.14.1 of A Law
Operations and calculations (Strip method) or Same as (Grab method)
B Law
The yarn is slid off each other and its maximum resistance (N) is measured.
Calculate the average value and round it to one decimal place.
8.23.3 Pin hook method
The pin hooking method shall be as follows.
a) Pin hooking method
procedure 6 From the sample adjusted in the above, set a test piece of 50 mm × about 150 mm in the vertical direction,
Three samples were taken in each of the horizontal
Figure5directions.
mm (part a) from one end along the long side as shown
50
Remove the yarn in the short side direction with a width of 5 mm (part b)Figure
from Insert
the
51 a pin like
8.14.1 of A Law
Attached to an object tensile tester, (Strip method) or B Law
(Grab method)
The tensioning speed was 150 mm or 200 mm per minute, and the part c was pulled.
Measure force (N).
56
L 1096： 2010
Unit: mm Unit: mm
Figure− 50
Test pieces Figure− 51
Metal pin
b) Calculation
Calculate the average of the vertical and horizontal directions three times each, and round to one decimal place.
8.24 Wrinkles after washing
Wrinkles after washing,
A Law(Method using an agitated washing machine)
, B Law(Method using a cylinder type washing machine) or
( ISO Method).
C Law
8.24.1 A Method (method using agitated washing machine)
A Law
(Method using agitated washing machine) A-1 Law
Or A-2 Law
And the following.
a) Equipment and auxiliary parts
1) A dehydrator is installed in the washing
Washing machine machine
Table as
17well
tub,
as Agitated
Figure 52 washing machine or
Use a washing machine with equivalent performance.
Table−17
Washing machine specifications
Water capacity 40 L ~ 70 L
Rotating blade rotation speed 65 times / minute to 90 times / minute
Rotating blade rotation angle 180 ° ~ 240 °
500 times / minute to 720 times / minute
Dehydration tank rotation speed (final centrifugal dehydration speed)
Inner diameter 400 mm to 550 mm
57
L 1096： 2010
Figure− 52
Example of agitated washing machine
2) Die cut, scoured, bleached with hydrogen peroxide and finished without glue, approximately 900
Load cloth JISmm
L x 900 mm
0803 Attached white cloth / cotton No. 3-1 stipulated in the above. The specifications of the loadAs
Table cloth
18
is there.
Table−18
Load cloth specifications
Thread Yarn fineness dtex Density book / 5 cm
Warp yarn Weft Warp yarn Weft
Cotton thread 200 160 141 135
3) Tumble dryer Inside a rotating drum about 66 cm in diameter and about 46 cm in depth, three drums are placed at 120 ° intervals.
Rotating at about 50 times / min with a dryer equipped with a dryer, the drying temperature can be adjusted to 40 ° C to 70 ° C or
Use a dryer with equivalent performance.
b) Sample preparationIs amethod
clause 6AFrom the sample prepared in accordance with
Take three pieces each in the wale direction and in the horizontal or course direction, and avoid fraying if necessary.
Edging and marking in vertical or wale direction.
c) A-1 Law ( one time method)
1) operation
Pour water at about 40 ° C up to the level line of the washing machine tank, and add
JIS 1 g / LStipulate
K 3371 to this.
Add a synthetic detergent and stir well to dissolve the detergent. Negative on three test pieces so that bath ratio is 1:40
Add a small amount of packing to the washing liquid and perform automatic washing operation. The temperature of the water used for rinsing
Set to 40 ° C. However, if necessary, the washing temperature may be 50 ° C or 60 ° C. Also,
If necessary, room temperature water may be used as the rinse water. In these cases, each temperature shall be
Add it to the notice.
1.1) Although
Automatic washing the automatic washing operation differs slightly depending on the washing machine,
operation
Use things.
Washing 12 minutes → draining 2 minutes → centrifugal dewatering and spraying 2 minutes → water supply 3 minutes to 5 minutes → r
58
L 1096： 2010
Centrifugal dehydration and spraying 2 minutes → Centrifugal dehydration 4 minutes.

2) Dry After washing, dry in one of the following ways:
2.1) Drip drying This drying method is mainly used for wash and wear fabrics,
Without dewatering, grasp several places so that the vertical direction and the wale direction are vertical, and
Hang and dry in a well ventilated place.
2.2) Line drying After dehydration, grasp several places so that the vertical direction and the wale direction are vertical, and
Hang and dry in a well ventilated place.
2.3) Tumble drying After dehydration, immediately remove the test piece and the load cloth, a) 3) Tumble
disentangle them,
Place in a dryer, dry at a temperature of 40 to 70 ° C for about 30 minutes, stop heating, and rotate for about 5 minutes to cool down
I do. When the dryer stops, remove the test piece immediately.
d) A-2 Method (iterative method)
1) Operation A-1 method
After repeating the washing and drying steps 5 times, the dried specimens are
Hang in several places vertically in the test room for at least 2 hours and leave to stand.
e) Installed in a dark room
Judgment FigurePlace
53 one test piece on the observation plate of the observation device shown in
And place judgment standards on both sides. Judgment is made by three skilled observers separately for each specimen.
First, one observer stands 122 cm away from the observation plate in front of the specimen, and removes the specimen.
Compare the appearance withTable 19 grade
the standard
The for is
judgment
determined according to the criteria of Continue with the other two specimens.
If so, determine the grade in the same way. The other two observers also independently graded the three specimens.
Set.
59
L 1096： 2010
Unit: mm
Four lighting lamps of FL40W of JIS C 7601 or two of approximately 2400 mm length with equivalent illuminance, reflective
The interior of the board shall be painted with white enamel and the illuminance of the lighting lamps should always be constant.
Also, two lighting lamps of JIS C 7601 FL40W may be used. However, in this case, the standard for judgment
Of (grade), 1, 3 and 4 must be placed on the left side facing the observation board, and 2, 3.5 and 5 must be placed on the right side.
The color of the surface of the observation plate is the gray scale for pollution No. 2 bShall
specified
Two be equivalent
in JIS L 0805.
to
Figure− 53
Example of observation device
Note Judgment standards include

AATCC Test Method 124 (Appearance of Fabrics after Repeated Home
Laundering) has a standard six-dimensional replica, etc. ( Table reference)
19 .
Table−19
Criteria for wrinkles
grade Criteria for wrinkles
Five Equivalent to the appearance of a standard 5 replica for judgment
Four Equivalent to the appearance of the standard 4 replica for judgment
3.5 Equivalent to the appearance of a standard 3.5 replica for judgment
Three Equivalent to the appearance of the standard 3 replica for judgment
Two Equivalent to the appearance of the standard 2 replica for judgment
1 The same or worse than the appearance of the Judgment Standard 1 replica
f) Calculation
The evaluation of the wrinkles after washing was based on the three observers' judgment values for three test pieces, ie, nine judgment va
Calculate the average of and round to one decimal place. In addition, the type of test method and drying method shall be described in the test rep
Add it.
60
L 1096： 2010
8.24.2 B Method (method using a cylinder type washing machine)

B Law B-1 Law
(Method using a cylinder type washing machine) Or B-2 Law
And the following.
a) Is 8.24.1
Preparation of test piece of A Law
B method The same test piece as in (Method using an agitated washing machine) is used.
b) Cylinder
Cylinder type washing machinetype washing machine (washer), inner width 500 mm to 610 mm, inner diameter 450 mm to 610 mm
With three perforated cylinders of about 75 mm height at 120 ° intervals in the cylinder
The rotation speed is about 54 m / min as the peripheral speed under load, and reverses every 5 to 10 times.
c) operation
1) Fillmethod)
B-1 Law ( one time the cylinder type washing machine with water at about 40 ° C in an amount sufficient to cover the test specimen (about
At a rate of 1 g / L JIS K 3371 Add the synthetic detergent for clothing as specified in, and stir well to dissolve the detergent.
Understand. Three test pieces were added 8.24.1 2) Theliquid.
to thisa)washing weight of the load cloth specified in
And start operation. After 15 minutes of treatment, stop operation, replace with fresh water at approx.
After rinsing, stop the operation, replace with fresh water at about 40 ° C, and continue rinsing for 108.24.1
minutes.
c) After dehydration
2.3) Tumble drying.
2) B-2 Method (iterative method) Repeat the washing and drying steps 5 times.
B-1 method
d) Rating 8.24.1of A Law
The wrinkles after washing are evaluated in the same manner as described above. The test report shall include the processi
Annex N by.
Wrinkles after washing,
8.25 Drying
The drying property is as follows.
a) Dryness is defined6 in
procedure From
clause
the sample prepared by the procedure described above, three 400 mm × 400 mm test pieces were collected.
Spread in water at 20 ° C ± 2 ° C, allow to absorb enough water, then pull out of the water to prevent water drops
And thenFig. 54
Attach it to a drying time measuring device as shown in
Measure the time (min) until the volume is reached.
b) Calculate the average of three times and round to the nearest integer.
Calculation
− Example of drying time measuring device

Fig. 54
61
L 1096： 2010
8.26 Breathable
A Law
The air permeability
(Fragile
is method) , B Law
(Gurley method) or C Law
( ISO Method).
8.26.1 A Method (Fragile method)
(Fragile method) is as follows.
A Law
a) FigureAnd
apparatus 55 a Frazier-type tester as shown in Fig.
Figure− 55
Example of Frazier type testing machine
b) procedure
1) Approximately 200 mm × 200 mm specimens are to be taken from each of the five different locations.
2) After attaching the test piece to one end of the cylinder of the testing machine, the tilt type barometer measures the pressure of 125 Pa by the rhe
Adjust the suction fan and air hole as shown, and measure the pressure indicated by the vertical barometer at that time.
3) Based on the measured pressure and the type of air hole used, the air passing through the test piece is calculated according to the conversion tab
Three Two
Volume (cm/cm ・ Request s).
c) Calculate the average of the results of the five tests and round to one decimal place.
Calculation
8.26.2 B Method (Gurley method)
B Law
(Gurley-type method) is mainly applied to fabrics with low air permeability.
Two
a) The tester has a mass of inner cylinder of 142 g and an effective(Diameter
apparatus area of the9 sample
mm), and
clamping plate of 64 mm.
Outer cylinder (height 254 mm and inner diameter
, Inner
82.6cylinder
mm) (height 254 mm, outer diameter 76.2 mm, inner diameter 74 mm and quality
Two
567 g) , Effective area of sample clamping(Diameter
plate 64228.6
mm mm).
b) procedure FigureGurley-shaped
Approximately 50 mm × 50 mm test pieces were collected from five different 56
locations of the
breathable
sample. like
Insert the test piece into the air outlet of the testing machine and screw up the Tighten
capstan.the specimen on the AB side.
Next, a constant pressure (depending on the) weight
Required
of to
theblow
inner300
cylinder).
mL of air through the sample.
The air permeability is expressed by the required time (seconds). The measurement is made at three different locations on one test piece.
c) Calculate the average value of the five test pieces and round it to one decimal place.
Calculation
62
L 1096： 2010
Unit: mm
Figure− 56
Example of Gurley type air permeability tester
Note The air permeability
JIS Pis8117 Clause 6 There is Oken type test machine method.
To measure the air permeability
Annex of O
theby.
fabric,
8.27 Insulation
8.27.1 A Method (constant temperature method)
Thermal insulation
A Law(Constant temperature method) is as follows.
a) Procedure For each sample, take approximately one specimen of about 300 mm x 300 mm from two different
A method Figureplaces.
57
Attach the test piece to a constant temperature heating element using a heat retention tester such as
Two hours after the calorific value became constant and the surface temperature of the heating element showed a constant value, it passed throug
Find the heat loss dissipated. It is dissipated in the same temperature difference and time as it is without the specimen and bare
Measure heat loss.
a) Measurement site b) Cross section of measurement site
Figure− 57
Example of heat retention tester (constant temperature method)
63
L 1096： 2010
b) Calculation
The heat retention rate (%) is obtained by the following equation. The measurement was performed twice, and the average was calculated
Round to digits. In addition, the conditions such as the temperature difference between the outside air and the surface of the heating element, win
⎛ b⎞
Wr = ⎜1 − ⎟× 100
⎝ a⎠
here, Wr : Heat retention rate (%)
Two
a : Heat dissipation (J / cm ・ S) Two
b : Heat dissipation (J / cm) when the sample is attached to・theS)heating element
8.28 Lightfastness
Light fastness is specified
6 From the
in clause
sample prepared in accordance with the above, collect the required size
JISand number
B 7751 or of test pieces,
Is JIS B 7754 After irradiating for a predetermined time using the light resistance tester specified in
You. This test piece is subjected to tests for tensile strength, waterproofness, color change, etc. as necessary.
For example, the tensile strength retention is determined by the following equation.
G
Sm = 1 × 100
G
here, Sm : Tensile strength retention (%)
G : Tensile strength before irradiation (N)
G1: Tensile strength after irradiation (N)
In addition, judgment of color change
JIS is
L usually
0804 This is performed using the gray scale specified in the above. JIS
TheLtest conditions are
0842 Or JIS L 0843 by.
8.29 Weatherability
The change of weather resistance tensile strength and color and waterproofness shall be as follows.
a) Changes in tensile strengthThe
andchange
color in tensile strength and colorJIS
of weathering
L 0891 by.
b) Waterproof
Waterproofness in weather resistance is required
JISasLa0891
pretreatment.
After processing by
JIS L 1092 by.
Note Outdoor exposure method exposure method applies mainly to woolen fabrics. Specimen of any size from the sample
The outdoor
Shall be collected and attached to a wooden frame, and the wooden frame shall be placed on a horizontal surface at a 45 ° angle on the
And exposed, usually for 20 days, to exposure to sunlight and weather. Compare the discoloration before and after the test
It is better to determine the color change.
If there is a standard sample, cut the test piece from both the sample and the standard sample and conduct the test at the same time.
Yes, sometimes compare the two. The discoloration of the sample specimen is less than that of the standard specimen.
If not, the study should be stopped within 20 days.
8.30 Glue
The glue is JIS L 1095 of 9.27 (Glue).
8.31 Resin qualification and resin amount
Resin qualitative and resin amount
JIS L 1041 of 6.1 (Resin qualitative test) and
6.2 (Resin amount).
8.32 Fats and oils
The fat content
JISisL 1095 of 9.28 [Fats and oils (diethyl ether extraction method)
]by.
8.33 Solvent extractables
Solvent extractables
JIS L 1095 of 9.30 (Solvent extraction).
8.34 Washing weight loss
Washing weight
A loss
Or
Law by.
B Law
8.34.1 A Law
64
L 1096： 2010
A Law
Is to take two test pieces of about 100 mm × 100 mm from the sample and wrap them with white cotton thread so as not to fray the cut.
After that, weigh the absolute dry mass (mg). This test
JISpiece
K 3302 0.25% solid laundry soap without additive (one kind)
JIS K 8625 For 20 minutes in a solution at 50 ° C ± 2 ° C (bath ratio 1:50) containing 0.25% of the special grade anhydrous sodium carbonate specifi
Stir, wash thoroughly with water at 50 ° C ± 2 ° C, weigh absolutely dry (mg), and reduce washing by the following formula.
(%), Calculate the average of two rounds, and round to one decimal place.
W − W1
Rw = × 100
W
Where R w : Washing weight loss rate (%)
W : Absolute dry mass before washing (mg)

W1: Absolute dry mass after washing (mg)
8.34.2 B Law
B Law
Is JIS L 1095 of 9.29 (Wash loss).
8.35 Training
Deductions apply to silk fabrics, as follows.
a) Take three test specimens of 200 mm × 200 mm or more from three different places of the sample, and measure the quality under the stand
procedure
Weigh. this JIS K 3302 0.5% solid laundry soap without additive (one kind)JIS K 1408 No. 1-3
Boil for 1 hour in a solution containing 0.2% sodium silicate (bath ratio 1:30). Next, this is warm water
After washing several times with water and drying, weigh it under standard conditions. More than medium weight, dense like poplin
For ordinary woven fabrics and special woven fabrics such as tough yarn woven fabric, etc., which are usually kneaded twice, the above operatio
Later, weigh the mass under standard conditions.
b) The rate of reduction (%) is calculated by the following formula, the average of three times is calculated, and rounded to one decimal pla
Calculation
W −W ′
DL = × 100
W
here, DL: Reduction rate (%)
W : Mass before extraction (g)
W ' : Mass after extraction (g)
8.36 Free formaldehyde amount
The amount of free formaldehyde
JISisL 1041 of 6.3 (Free formaldehyde test).
8.37 Extract pH
The pH of the extract is ( JIS Law) or
A Law ( ISO Act) and the following.
B Law
a) A Law ( JIS method)
1) Take a test piece of 5.0 g ± 0.1 g from the sample and make a piece of about 10 mm × 10 mm. Separately with glass stopper
procedure
Pour 50 mL of distilled water into a 200-mL flask, boil gently for 2 minutes, and remove the flask from the heat source.
Place the above fragment sample in a flask, stopper the flask, and leave for 30 minutes. During this time, I sometimes put a stopper
Loosen and shake the flask. After 30 minutes, adjust the extract to 25 ° C ± 2 ° C.
JIS Z 8805 PH specified in
Measure the pH of the extract with a measuring instrument.
2) The test shall be performed on two test pieces, the average value shall be calculated and rounded to one decimal place.
Calculation
b) B Law ( ISO law)
Annex
To measure the pH of the water P by.
extract,
8.38 Barium activity number
Two
The barium activity number is mainly applied to the measurement of the degree of mercerization
Cut to size.
of cotton.
65
L 1096： 2010
Other than that,JIS L 1095 of 9.32 (Barium activity number).

8.39 Dimensional change
8.39.1 Test method types
The type of dimensional change test method shall be as follows. However, depending on the purpose of the test, the following processing method o
Use together.
a) Immersion treatment method
1) A Law
(Room temperature water immersion method)
2) (Boiling water immersion method)
B Law
3) (Penetration immersion method)
C Law
(Soap liquid immersion method)
Four)D Law
b) Washing method
1) E Law
(Washing test machine method)
2) (Washer method)
F Law
(Low temperature washer method)
F-1 Law
(Medium temperature washer method)
F-2 Law
F-3 Law
(High temperature washer method)
3) G Law
(Home electric washing machine method)
c) Press processing method
1) (Press method)
H Law
(Dry heat press method)
H-1 Law
H-2 Law
(Steaming open method)
H-3 Law
(Steaming pressurization method)
(Steam heating lock method)
H-4 Law
d) Dry cleaning treatment method
1) (Dry cleaning method)
J Law
J-1 Law
(Perchlorethylene method)
J-2 Law
(Petroleum Law)
8.39.2 Utensil
The equipment used for measurement shall be as follows.
a) The length
Length measuring devicemeasuring
JIS device
B 7516 1 mm with the accuracy specified in
What can be measured up to. However, the length of the part whose length is to be measured shall be longer than the length.
b) Marking toolWhat is needed to mark the measuring points is as follows.
1) ink What withstands processing such as washing.
2) A plate with lines drawn in a grid to mark the measurement points, with holes at the intersections.
Template
3) SewingOf a color that can be clearly distinguished from the color of the fabric.
thread
Four)Wire A small hole can be made by heating.
Note Suitable for those used for thermoplastic fibers.
Five)Stapler
Note Suitable for those that do not agitate the specimen (eg, immersion test).
c) Larger than the sample, with a smooth, flat surface.
Workbench
66
L 1096： 2010
d) Iron The iron used in this test is With a mass of 1.3 kg to It

2.7can
kg,be adjusted to the specified temperature.
However, if specified by the test method, the rules shall be followed.
8.39.3 Preparation of test specimen
The preparation of test pieces shall be as follows.
If the fabric is likely to be loosened during the test operation, cut the test piece slightly larger than the specified size.
Overhang the edge of the test piece with a thread that has little dimensional change. Also, according to the agreement between the delivery and delive
Can be changed.
a) For textiles The number of test pieces
F LawThenistwo or more, Other than the above, the number of sheets isTable
F Law three,ofdepending on the type of test.
20
It is as follows.
Table−20
Specimen type for woven fabric
Unit: mm
a)
Exam type Specimen size Length of length measurement section
(Length x width)
A Method (room temperature water immersion method)
B Method (boiling water immersion method)
Approx. 250 × 250 200
C Method (penetration immersion method)
D Method (soap immersion method)
E Method (washing machine method) Approx. 250 × 250 200
F Law (washer method) About 500 × 500 400
G Law (home electric washing machine About
method)
400 × 400 200
H Method (press method)
Approx. 250 × 250 200
J Method (dry cleaning method)
note All length measurement sections shall have the same length for each of the warp and weft directions.
a)
Align
b) For knitting Table

In the case of knitted fabrics, two test specimens shall be used for 21
eachMake
type to the size of. Test pieces
F Law
The method of making is usually single, , G Law
but J Law
as well as Has two layers of dough, with almost no dimensional change.
The edge of the test piece with
FigureAs59shown in the figure above, make sure there is a space of about 40 mm on the upper and lower sides in the length
Overcast (If folded in two, you may overhang three sides) , 1 specimen.
Note The size of the test piece is 400 mm x 300 mm, 500 mm x 400 mm, with the wale direction longer than the course direction.
It is desirable to make the size such as.
67
L 1096： 2010
Table−21
Type of test piece for knitted fabric
Unit: mm
Test method Specimen size Length of length measurement section
(Length x width)
A Method (room temperature water immersion method)
B Method (boiling water immersion method)
Approx. 250 x 250
200
C Method (penetration immersion method)
Approx. 300 x 300
D Method (soap immersion method)
E Method (washing machine method) Approx. 250 × 250 200
F Law (washer method) About 500 × 500 400
G Act (Home Electric Washing MachineAbout
Act) 300 × 300
About 500 × 500
H Method (press method) About 250 × 250
200
Approx. 250 x 250
J Method (wash cylinder method) Approx. 300 x 300
About 500 × 500
8.39.4 Marking method

Place the test specimen on theFig.
workbench,
The vertical and horizontal directions (for knitted fabrics, wale
58
Direction and course direction) shall be marked with three or more pairs of marks at equal intervals. Distance between two marks in each pair
The separation shall be of the specified length and shall not be marked less than 20 mm from the edge of the specimen. Next, the test piece
JIS L 0105 of 5.1.1 (Standard condition) or after leaving the test room for at least 4 hours in the standard condition,
Place it on a table, take care not to stretch it, and take care not to distort it.
Measure the length, and use it as the measurement reference length before processing. All length measurement sections have the same length in the v
Get ready.
Unit: mm
− Marking example
Fig. 58 Figure− 59Example of stacking allowance
Two
68
L 1096： 2010
8.39.5 Test method

The test method for dimensional change shall be as follows.
a) Immersion treatment method
1) A Immerse
Method (room temperature water the test
immersion piece inMethod
method) water atA25 ± C ± 2 30C for 30 min.
After passing through, centrifuge the specimen within 1 minute or gently drain to remove the water, and then place it between paper or cloth.
Sandwiched between, hold down andPerform
8.39.6 dehydrate,
screen drying (flat drying) as specified in.
2) B Method (boiling water immersion
Is method)
to soak theMethod B in boiling water for 30 minutes.A Law
test piece The same way as
Dehydrate and dry with.
3) C Test specimen
Method (penetration immersion JIS L 0860 25 ° C ± 2 ° C containing 0.05% nonionic surfactant specified
method)
Immersed in an aqueous solution for 30 minutes to allow sufficient
A LawDehydrate
penetration,
and dry in the same manner as described above.
4) D Method (soap immersion method)Is the
D method
test pieceJIS K 3302 0.5% of additive-free soap (1 kind) specified in
Immerse in a warm aqueous solution at 50 ° C ± 2 ° C for 20 minutes (bath ratio 1:50). Next, remove the test piece and
Drain water and soak for 20 minutes in warm water at 50 ° C ± 2A° Law
C.Dehydrate and dry in the same manner as described above.
b) Washing method
1) E Use
Method (washing tester method) JIS L the
0844specified washing machine (testing machine)JIS
in K 3302 Niki
0.5% of the additive-free soap (one kind) to be added to a test bottle of a testing machine with 300 mL of a warm aqueous solution at 38 ° C ±
Insert, seal, attach to the rotating shaft of the tester, and operate at the same temperature for 15 minutes. Next, the test containing the test piece
Remove the bottle, rinse with 3 changes of hot water at 38 ° C ± 2 ° C, and test again with 300 mL of hot water at the same temperature.
Seal in a bottle, attach to the rotating shaft of the tester, and operate at the same temperature
A LawIn the
for same
5 minutes.
way asnext,
Water and dry.
2) F Law (washer method)
2.1) Equipment and instruments
The main equipment and instruments used in this test are as follows.
2.1.1) The washing equipment
Washing equipment 8.24.2 of B Law
Shall be stipulated.
2.1.2) The load cloth
Load cloth JISisL 0803 It uses the attached white cloth and cotton No. 3-1 specified in
Usually, it is the same size as the test piece.
2.1.3) Flatbed press Flatbed presses with a press area of 500 mm x 500 mm or more
It can be adjusted to the specified temperature.
2.1.4) Iron The iron shall weigh approximately 2.7 kg and be adjustable to the specified temperature.
2.2) Washing processThe operation of is based on one of the following processing methods.
F Law
2.2.1) F-1 Sufficient
Method (low temperature washer amount
method)of test strip to cover the washing
(About
machine
60 L)
Hot water
(About 40 ° C)
And put the test piece into 1.4 kg, JIS K 3303 Nothing specified in
Add the additive powder laundry soap (one type) to an approximately 0.1% solution and run for 15 minutes. However, the test
If the piece weighs less than 1.4 kg, add a load cloth to the specified load. Then, a new about 40 ℃
Switch to hot water for 5 minutes, and then switch to fresh hot water at about 40 ° C for 10 minutes.
After draining, remove the test specimens, centrifugally dehydrate them to a water content of about 55%, and place them one by one at a
Press with a 150 ° C flatbed press. However, if the flatbed press cannot be used
At this time, an iron of the same temperature may be used.
The temperature of the flatbed press or iron must be such that the test piece requires a lower temperature than the specified temperature.
When fibers are included or processed with resin, etc., the temperature shall be at an appropriate temperature, and the temperature shall be
Add it to the notice. Also, instead of drying with a flatbed press or iron, 8.39.6 a) Or
69
L 1096： 2010
8.39.6 b) Any of the prescribed methods may be selected for the drying method. In this case, test to that effect
Appended to the report.
2.2.2) F-2 Sufficient
Method (medium temperature amount
washer of test strip to cover the washing
method) (Aboutmachine
60 L)
Hot water
(About 60 ° C)
And put the test piece into 1.4 kg, JIS K 3303 Nothing specified in
Add additive powder laundry soap (one type) to a 0.1% solution and run for 30 minutes. However, the test
If the piece weighs less than 1.4 kg, add a load cloth to the specified load. Then, a new about 40 ℃
Switch to hot water for 5 minutes, and then switch to fresh hot water at about 40 ° C for 10 minutes.
F-1 Law
next,
Dehydrate and dry in the same manner as described above.
2.2.3) F-3 Method (high temperature washerApplies
method)mainly
F-3 to textiles. The test piece is covered by the washing machine
method
Pour enough hot water (approx. 60 L) (approx.
And start operation. However, when the test piece weighs less than 1.4 kg, add a load cloth to the specified load.
Amount.
Simultaneously, live steam was added and the temperature was quickly raised. When the
JIS temperature
K 3303 Nikireached 100 ° C, the steam was clo
Add the additive-free powdered laundry soap (one type) to make a solution of about 0.05%. 40 minutes from operation start
Later, the water was replaced with fresh water, and the temperature was raised to 60 ° C within 5 minutes.
Drain after 10 minutes at 60 ° C. Next, after operating for 5 minutes without water, remove the test specimen.
During the test, the washing machine was operated continuously without stopping for 60 minutes.
Perform as soon as possible. next, Dehydrate and dry in the same manner as described above.
F-1 Law
3) G Method (Pulsator type household electric washing machine of
method) [Test
JIS1method
Appendix L 0217 by symbol-How to wash (water
wash) The test method specified in No. 103] is used. If the test piece does not reach the specified weight, add a load cloth.
The specified load shall be used. TheJIS
loadLcloth
0803 isUse the attached white cloth and cotton No. 3-1 specified in
The periphery of × 300 mm shall be bordered. However, a load cloth of the same size as the test piece may be used.
No.
In case of drip drying without dehydration treatment, it shall be added to the test report.
c) Press processing method
1) apparatus
The press used in this test has a press area of 400 mm x 400 mm or more,
The temperature can be adjusted (± 2 ° C with respect to the set temperature at the center of the iron surface).
Shall be provided. However, The press used for steaming should be a machine without steaming device.
H-1 Law
You may.
2) The press operation is performed by one of the following methods. However, when steaming is used,
operation
The upper or lower iron should be added to the test report.
2.1) H-1 Method (dry heat pressing method)
Set the upper iron on the press at a specified temperature, and carefully place the test piece in the center of the lo
And press for 20 s at a pressure of 39 kPa, raise the iron and aspirate for 20 s. However, bulkiness
For knitted fabrics using processed yarn, the pressure shall be 20 kPa. Also, depending on the type of fiber,
Table Warmth
22
If fibers are mixed, use the lower temperature. However, different temperatures were used
If so, the temperature shall be noted in the test report.
70
L 1096： 2010
Table−22
Set temperature table for each material during press processing
Preset temperature
Material name
°C
Cotton, hemp 180
Wool, polynosic, rayon, cupra 160
Polyester (PET, PTT, PBT) , Vinylon 140
Silk, acetate, triacetate, nylon, acrylic 120
Acrylic, polyclar, polyurethane, promix, polylactic acid 100
2.2) H-2 Method (steaming open method)

The steam pressure of the press was set to 490 kPa, and the test piece was carefully lowered to the center.
And lower the iron to about 20 mm from the surface of the test piece. After steaming for 15 seconds,
Raise and raise for 15 seconds.
2.3) H-3 The pressmethod)
Method (steam pressurization machine has a vapor pressure of 490 kPa Table
and anSet
upper
22 to airon
predetermined
temperature.
temperature
AndPlace the test piece carefully in the centerLower
of thethe
lower
ironpart,
to a position approximately 20 mm from the surface of the specimen.
After steaming for 20 seconds, lower the upper iron down,H-1 Law After pressing at the specified pressure for 20 seconds,
Raise the iron and aspirate for 20 seconds.
2.4) H-4 The press machine has a vapor pressure of 490 kPa Table
Method (steaming lock method) and anAt
upper
22 a predetermined
iron temperature.
temperature.
And place the test piece carefully in the center of H-1
the Law
At the specified pressure for 20 seconds.
After lifting, raise the iron and aspirate for 20 seconds.
d) Dry cleaning treatment method
1) Equipment and instruments
1.1) The washing equipment
Washing equipment FigureA60
wash cylinder type washing machine with the structure shown in
Shall be provided.
Cylinder capacityAbout 12 L
Rotation axis angle 50 °
− 1
rotation speed About 45 min
Figure− 60
Example of wash cylinder type washing machine
1.2) Load cloth

The load clothJIS
is L 0803 Use a polyester cloth as specified in (attached white cloth No. 8-1) and border the periphery.
It is usually the same size as the test piece.
1.3) Tumble dryer The tumble dryer is 8.39.6 c) 1) Shall be as specified.
1.4) The press machine
Press machine 8.39.5 c) 1) Shall be as specified.
2) J Method (dry cleaning method) The operation
J-1 is (Perchlorethylene method) or
Law (Petroleum Law)
J-2 Law
71
L 1096： 2010
Depending on one of
Users of this standard should be aware of safety and health concerns, even if they are familiar with normal laboratory work.
warning
Appropriate action must be taken. Perchlorethylene is harmful to human body by suction
Note that industrial gasoline may catch fire due to improper handling.
Must be treated with care.
2.1) J-1 Method (perchlorethylene method)This operation pays particular attention to ventilation. The test solution is perchloroethylene.
4L JIS L 0860 2 g of the anionic surfactant specified in JIS L 0860 Non-ion specified in
Dissolve 2 g of surfactant Furthermore,
Add 8 mL of water and stir well to obtain a uniform solution.
Pour the test solution at 40 ° C into the cylinder of the washing cylinder type washing machine so that the test piece weighs 200 g.
And put into it and run for 15 minutes. However, if the test piece weighs less than 200 g,
To obtain the specified load. Next, centrifuge the specimens or gently press them to drain the solution.
Of wire mesh, blinds or the like placed between paper or cloth, held down, drained and placed horizontally
Allow to air dry on top.
Note that tumble drying may be performed instead of natural drying.
2.2) J-2 Law (petroleum law)The test solution
JIS Kis2201 No. 5 (cleaning solvent) specified in 4 L
do it, JIS L 0860 2 g of the anionic surfactant specified in JIS L 0860 Nonionic surfactant specified in
Dissolve 2 g of the active agent, add 8 mL of water, and stir well to obtain a uniform solution. 35 ° C
Into the cylinder of the washing-cylinder type washing machine so that the test piece weighs 200 g.
Pour into it and run for 35 minutes. However, if the test piece weighs less than 200 g, add a load cloth.
The specified load shall be used.J-1
next,
LawDehydrate and dry in the same manner as described above.
8.39.6 Drying method
Drying shall be performed by selecting one of the following and shall be added to the test report.
a) Line drying (hanging) method Line drying can be done after or without dewatering.
It is better not to use it for knitted fabrics that easily stretch.
1) Line drying Line drying is performed by dehydrating the test specimens so that the vertical or wale direction is vertical.
Grasp the part, hang and dry under standard conditions. However, if it does not depend on the JIS
standard state,
Z 8703 of
Dry in the shade at room temperature (5 ° C to 35 ° C) 8.39.7 Adjustment after processing.
2) Drip ・Line drying (no dehydration hanging Thedrying) a) 1) of
drip line drying does not dehydrate the specimen,
Dry the line.
b) Screen drying (flat drying) method
1) Screen drying Screen drying is unnatural after the specimen has been dehydrated without twisting or stretching.
Except for wrinkles, place on a horizontal screen mesh or similar perforated surface and spread a) 1) Same as
Dry under the same conditions.
2) Drip ・Screen drying (no horizontal drying) Drip screen drying does not dehydrate the specimens,
b) 1) Screen drying.
c) Tumble drying methodThe tumble drying method is as follows.
1) apparatus
The tumble dryer is A rotary drum with a capacity of 80 L to 130 L has two to three pieces inside.
It shall be able to adjust to the specified drying temperature, or shall have equivalent performance.
Note It is desirable to use a tumble dryer that has solvent resistance.
J-1 Law
Use an explosion-proof tumble dryer because of the possibility of ignition.
warningJ-2 Law
72
L 1096： 2010
2) Tumble drying Tumble drying shall be one of the following.

8.39.5 of F Law
(Washer method), G Law Law
(Pulsator type household electric washing machineJ method)
(Dry chestnut
and
After washing, the test piece and the load cloth that have been dehydrated or drained are washed according to one of the
Immediately remove the specimen, loosen the tangle of the test piece and load cloth, and put it in the tumble
J Lawdryer. However,
When treated with, only put the test cloth.
2.1) After
Low temperature tumble thoroughly drying the test piece and load cloth at a temperature not exceeding 60 ° C, stop heating and
drying
Then cool by rotating for about 5 minutes. Remove the test piece immediately after the dryer stops.
2.2) At adrying
High temperature tumble temperature not exceeding
2.1) 80
Dried
° C by the same method as low-temperature tumble drying
I do.
8.39.7 Adjustment and measurement after treatment
The adjustment and measurement method after treatment shall be as follows.
a) Ironing Perform ironing if necessary.
1) The dried specimens are lightly moistened with a sprayer if necessary and finished with an iron at about 50 ° C.
Leave for 4 hours in the standard test room. In this case, this shall be noted in the test report.
2) If necessary, JIS L 1057 of A-2 Law
Perform iron finishing by the method specified in (Mist blowing iron method).
In this case, this shall be noted in the test report.
b) Adjustment
The sample or specimenJIS
is L 0105 of 5.1.1 Until it is in the (standard condition) condition or in the test room in the standard condition
Leave for at least 4 hours.
c) Place the specimen on the workbench,
Measuring method Remove wrinkles, taking care not to stretch the specimen.
Next, while taking care not to distort the test piece, use a length measuring instrument to determine the distance between the two pairs of marks.
Measure to the nearest 1 mm.
8.39.8 Calculation
The calculation of the dimensional change shall be based on the length of three measuring sections in the vertical and horizontal directions, or in th
Calculate the average value (up to one decimal place) and calculate the dimensional change rate (up to two decimal places) using the following formu
I do. Next, the average value of each test piece is calculated for each of the vertical and horizontal directions, or the wale and course directions, and
Rounded to one decimal place.
LTwo− L1 ×
ΔL = 100
L1
here, ΔL : Dimensional change rate (%)
L1: Length before processing (mm)
LTwo
: Length after processing (mm)
9 Test report
The test report shall state the following:
a) Exam date
b) Standard number
c) Test method
d) Test condition
e) Test results
73
L 1096： 2010
References
Test methods related to this standard include the following standards.
1 Dye fastness test method
a) JIS L 0841 Test method for color fastness to sunlight
b) JIS L 0842 Dye fastness test method for ultraviolet carbon arc lamp light
c) JIS L 0843 Dye fastness test method for xenon arc lamp light
d) JIS L 0844 Method for testing color fastness to washing
e) JIS L 0845 Dye fastness test method for boiling water
f) JIS L 0846 Test method for dye fastness to water
g) JIS L 0847 Test method for color fastness to seawater
h) JIS L 0848 Dye fastness test method for sweat
i) JIS L 0849 Dye fastness test method for friction
j) JIS L 0850 Dye fastness test method for hot pressing
k) JIS L 0851 Dye fastness test method for acid dripping
l) JIS L 0852 Dye fastness test method for alkali dripping
m) JIS L 0853 Dye fastness test method for water dripping
n) JIS L 0854 Dye fastness test method for sublimation
o) JIS L 0855 Dye fastness test method for nitrogen oxides
p) JIS L 0856 Dye fastness test method for chlorine bleaching
q) JIS L 0860 Dye fastness test method for dry cleaning
r) JIS L 0869 Dye fastness test method for steaming
s) JIS L 0879 Dye fastness test method for dry heat treatment
t) JIS L 0884 Dye fastness test method for chlorinated water
u) JIS L 0888 Test method for color fastness to light and sweat
v) JIS L 0889 Dye fastness test method for bleaching and washing with sodium percarbonate
w) JIS L 0890 Dye fastness test method for ozone
Physical property test method

Two
a) JIS B 7721 Tensile tester / Compression tester-Calibration method and verification method for force measurement system
b) JIS L 1030-1 Test methods for mixed ratio of textile products-Part 1: Fiber identification
c) JIS L 1030-2 Textile mix testing method-Part 2: Fiber mix
d) JIS L 1056 Friction melting test method for woven and knitted fabrics
e) JIS L 1058 Snag test method for woven and knitted fabrics
f) JIS L 1059-1 Test method for wrinkle resistance of textile products-Part 1: Measurement of recovery of horizontal fold wrinkles (Monsanto
Law)
g) JIS L 1059-2 Test method for wrinkle resistance of textile products-Part 2: Evaluation of appearance after wrinkling (wrinkle method)
h) JIS L 1060 Pleatability test method for woven and knitted fabrics
i) JIS L 1061 Bagging test method for woven and knitted fabrics
j) JIS L 1065 Method for determining dye group of dyed material
k) JIS L 1075 Test method for pile retention of woven and knitted fabrics
74
L 1096： 2010
l) JIS L 1076 Pilling test method for woven and knitted fabrics
m) JIS L 1091 Flammability test method for textile products
n) JIS L 1092 Testing method for waterproofness of textile products
o) JIS L 1093 Test method for seam strength of textile products
p) JIS L 1094 Test method for charging of woven and knitted fabrics
q) JIS L 1099 Textile moisture permeability test method
r) JIS L 1901 Reverse test method for woven and knitted fabrics
s) JIS L 1907 Water absorption test method for textile products
t) JIS P 8112 Paper-burst strength test method
u) JIS Z 8701 TenYTenZand
Color display method- XYZ color system TenColor
X system
v) JIS Z 8741 Specular gloss-measurement method
w) ASTM D523 Paint and Related Coating Standards -66T (Standards for paints and related coatings)
Other
Three
a) JIS H 4160 Aluminum and aluminum alloy foil
b) JIS H 4170 High purity aluminum foil
c) JIS K 7106 Testing method for bending stiffness of plastic using cantilever beam
d) JIS P 8117 Paper and paperboard-Air permeability and air resistance test method (intermediate area)-Gurley method
International Standard ( ISO )

Four
a) ISO 3998 , Textiles-Determination of resistance to certain insect pests
Measurement of resistance)
b) ISO 7768 , Textiles-Test method for assessing the smoothness appearance of fabrics after cleansing
Test method for evaluating the smoothness and appearance of fibers after washing)
c) ISO 7771 , Textiles-Determination of dimensional changes of fabrics induced by cold-water immersion
Product-Method of measuring dimensional change when immersed in cold water)
d) ISO 6330 : 2000, Textiles-Domestic washing and drying procedures for textile testing
Laundry and drying procedures in the home for)
e) ISO 3175-1 , Textiles-Professional care, drycleaning and wetcleaning of fabrics and garments-Part 1:
Assessment of performance after cleaning and finishing (fibre-dry cleaning and finishing-1st
Part: Method to evaluate whether fiber and clothes are selectable)
f) ISO 3175-2 , Textiles-Professional care, drycleaning and wetcleaning of fabrics and garments-Part 2:
Procedure for testing performance when cleaning and finishing using tetrachloroethene
Leaning and finishing-Part 2: Procedure for tetrachloroethene)
g) ISO 3175-3 , Textiles-Professional care, drycleaning and wetcleaning of fabrics and garments-Part 3:
Procedure for testing performance when cleaning and finishing using hydrocarbon solvents
Professional and dry cleaning and wet cleaning of clothing and clothing-Part 3: Hydrocarbon solvents
Performance test procedure for cleaning and finishing using
h) ISO 3175-4 , Textiles-Professional care, drycleaning and wetcleaning of fabrics and garments-Part 4:
Procedure for testing performance when cleaning and finishing using simulated wetcleaning
75
L 1096： 2010
And garment professional care, dry and wet cleaning-Part 4: Simulated clothing
Performance test procedure for cleaning and finishing using cleaning
i) ISO 13936-1 , Textiles-Determination of the slippage resistance of yarns at a seam in woven fabrics-Part 1:
Fixed seam opening method (Fiber products-Determination of yarn slippage resistance in woven seams-Part 1
Part: fixed seam cutting method)
j) ISO 13936-2 , Textiles-Determination of the slippage resistance of yarns at a seam in woven fabrics-Part 2:
Fixed load method (Textiles-Determination of yarn slippage resistance in woven seams-Part 2: Fixed load
Serious law)
k) ISO 13936-3 , Textiles-Determination of the slippage resistance of yarns at a seam in woven fabrics-Part 3:
Needle clamp method (Textile products-Determination of yarn slippage resistance in woven seams-Part 3: D
Idle clamp method)
76
L 1096： 2010
Annex A
(Regulation)
Textile products-Textiles-Structural analysis-
How to display organization charts, through holes, through holes and weaves
This annex was issued as the first edition in 1984 ISO 7211-1 , Textiles-Woven fabrics-Construction-
Methods of analysis-Part 1: Methods for the presentation of a weave diagram and plans for drafting, denting and
lifting, without any technical changes.
Through-through, weep-through and weave diagrams are not strictly within the scope of textile disassembly, but in this annex,
It is considered convenient to include these display methods. In a jacquard organization, only the beginning
The design paper shall be seamlessly colored light and dark so that it is applied in its entirety, and shall be applied to the whole.
Apply a series of card cutting instructions written with In the scope of this Annex,
It does not preclude the use of the design shortening scheme used in the hardwired organization. When using this annex
Notes are ISO 2959 as well
ISOas 3572 by. The definitions of the main terms used in this Annex are asISO
follows.
3572 To
According to
A.1 Scope of application

This annex deals with the recording of the texture of textiles, where different types of yarn are used in relation to the complete texture.
The method of expressing the order is specified. It also specifies the indication of the arrangement of warp and weft. This attachment
The letter applies to all fabrics, including multiple fabrics where the warp and the weft intersect, where the warp intersects.
it can.
Note If only a small sample (eg 4 cm x 4 cm) is available, Annex D as well as F ~ Appendix
Annex
( ISO
Appendix I 7211 It is advisable that the tests described in Sections other than Part 1) be performed in the following order:
New
a) Measure the area of the sample and measure the mass per unit area.
b) Release the fabric. The loosened yarn is put together for each warp and weft.
c) Using the loosened yarn, measure the mass and / or apparent fineness of the warp and weft yarns per unit area.
Set.
A.2 Reference standards

The following standards, by reference in this annex, form part of the provisions of this annex. this
The cited standards are the latest version (including
). supplements).
ISO 2959 , Textiles-Woven fabric descriptions
ISO 3572 , Textiles-Weaves-Definitions of general terms and basic weaves
A.3 principle
The complete structure shown on the design paper is adopted as a method of indicating the structure of the fabric. 2 types for warp and weft
When the above yarns are used, how to represent the arrangement of the different yarns in relation to the complete structure is specified. Color pa
A table method is used to indicate the order of the turn colors. Through, through
77
L 1096： 2010
The weave and weave diagram are shown in full organization and on the same design paper, and are associated with the full organization in a customa
A.4 apparatus
A.4.1 Design paper
ISO( 3572 reference)
A.4.2 Low-magnification magnifier (for example, textile disassembler)
A.4.3 tweezers
A.4.4 Scissors
A.4.5 Disassembly needle
A.5 Test pieces

Test specimens are selected from a dough containing several complete tissues.
A.6 operation
A.6.1 Release
Check the surface of the test piece, warp and weft. Whether to weft the warp or vice versa
Decide. Unwind the thread vertically from both ends of the test piece so that the end is approximately
A.6.21 As
cmshown
long.
The disassembly needle ( A.4.5 ), Slide the thread parallel to one end.
Let me. Sequentially loosen the yarn from the fabric, observe and record the interlaced state of the warp and weft, and record this
Continue until you get it. If necessary, the dough should be woven in order to clarify the warp and weft interlacing.
One side may be scorched only on the surface or lightly shaved.
A.6.2 ~ A.6.5 Record the complete organization, penetrating, penetrating, and weaving maps as described in. Also, if necessary
If A.6.6 Record the warp and weft arrangements as described above. However, low magnification
A.4.2 magnifier
See) (
If the complete tissue can be obtained directly by visual observation, the dough need not be disassembled.
A.6.2 Complete organization
By convention, design paper ( In the above square or rectangular rows, the rows in the warp direction are the
A.4.1
Consider the rows as weft. A mark indicating that one yarn (usually a warp yarn) is floating on the other yarn is printed on the design paper.
wear.
Unless otherwise specified, it is assumed that the mark on the design paper indicates that the warp is interlaced on the weft.
I do. There is little opportunity, but if this is inconvenient, specify weft float and mark the weft up.
To indicate that At the very least, it shall represent, on the design paper, one complete organization with a specified range.
It is desirable to show only one complete organization. Update the vertical and horizontal rows of cells in the previously recorded organizational un
If it is repeated, stop recording the organization chart. A simple complete organization,Figure A.1Shown
a) in
If convenient, the complete organization may be shortened. This means that two or more complete tissues are in the vertical or horizontal direction
It can be shortened if it is divided into more parts and each part consists of a sub-complete organization. sub
The complete organization is indicated by enclosing the relevant squares in parentheses (marks).
Figure A.1The
Displays the number of repetitions. a) organization
Figureof A.1Can
b) be shortened as follows.
Instead of filling the squares, it is convenient to use many types of marks (eg, diagonal, vertical or horizontal),
Particularly unusual symbols are good for clarifying the structure of the fabric (for example, multiple fabrics).
A.6.3 So through
Create a through hole at the top of the complete organization
Figure A.2reference]
[a) . Warp strings representing warp yarns in perfect organization
78
L 1096： 2010
Represents the same warp thread even if it passes through it. The row of rows indicates the level of the loom.
To represent a warp thread passing through a particular thread, a row of warps representing the warp thread and a thread
Put a cross in the cell that intersects this column. This should be described in a complete organization where possible.
May be abbreviated [ Figure A.2reference]
b) .
A.6.4 Through
The penetrator is indicated by a thick horizontal line completely traversing the rows of squares between the perfect organization and the penetrator.
Figure A.2reference]
Represents a warp thread passing through a) . Indications that shorten the complete organization and shorten it
Since this is not possible, fill in the margins between the complete organization and the penetrator, Figure A.2reference]
b) .
A.6.5 Weave diagram
Create a weave diagram to the right of the complete organization. The rows of squares that represent weft yarns in a complete organization are the
Represents a yarn. A fresh row of a weaving diagram corresponds to this. On the left side of the weaving diagram, the low penetration
Figure
It is the same as Uko. The two relationships A.3indicated by a right angled line. Other soko in both figures
are As
The relationship is similarly expressed. The weaving diagram may be shortened in the manner described for the complete organization.
A.6.6 Arrangement of warp and weft
The arrangement of the warp and weft yarns should be represented in the manner already described to indicate different yarns. But with color
This method is generally not possible because the size of the complete tissues is not equal or the two cannot be shortened identically.
It is. Figure The
A.4 table below shows the color patterns of the warp and weft yarns. In this table, each color is horizontal
Indicated by theThe
line number of threads in the same
Subsequent
color group
groups
is across that column are shown in exact order.
If the order of the groups is repeated in the range of the color pattern, it is not necessary to show them all. Group order
The introduction should be shown in a vertical line. At this time, the lower end of the vertical line is enclosed in parentheses (mark), and the number o
Add the numbers shown in parentheses. The color pattern is enclosed in double vertical lines, and the bottom of the vertical lines is enclosed in paren
In the case of a warp, the number of repetitions of the full width of the fabric is specified in parentheses. The first thread of the color pattern is a perfe
Corresponds to the first thread. For warp yarns at the edges of textiles, the sequence of colors which is partially or non-repeated is a color pattern
Are shown adjacent to the left and right sides of the double vertical line delimited by.
79
L 1096： 2010
− Complete
Figure A.1 a) organization
− Figure
Figure A.1 b) A.1 a) of
Shortened composition
80
L 1096： 2010
− Through
Figure A.2 a) and through of a complete organization − Fig.
Figure A.2 b) A.2 Short drawing of a)
81
L 1096： 2010
Figure −A.3
Shortened complete organization , Weave diagram and penetrating
Arrangement of warp yarn

Blue 2 2 2 2 760
760 beam 1 Weft arrangement
Yellow 2 2 2 2
Orange 4444 760 Green 8 8 16
White code 2 2 2 378 Beam 2 Orange 4 4 8
White code 2 2 Four
×2 ×2 ×2 ×2 28 total
2 658 total
× 94
Figure −A.4
Arrangement of warp and weft
82
L 1096： 2010
Annex B
(Regulation)
Textile-Fabric-Width and length measurement
First edition published in 2006

This annex contains: ISO 22198 , Textiles−Fabrics−Determination of width and
It was created based on length without changing the technical content.
B.1 Scope of application

This annex specifies a method for measuring the length and width of an untensed relaxed fabric.
You. This measuring method is to measure the full width, the center of the width folded in the length direction or rolled in a cylindrical shape, and the
Applicable to fabrics not exceeding. This annex specifies a method for examining fabric texture for defects or other defects.
It is not specified. It cannot be applied to coated fabrics.
B.2 Reference standards

The following standards, by reference in this International Standard, form part of the provisions of this International Standard. these
The normative reference is its latest version).(including any amendments).
ISO 139 , Textiles-Standard atmospheres for conditioning and testing
ISO 10012 , Measurement management systems-Requirements for measurement processes and measuring
equipment
B.3 Terms and definitions

The terms and definitions used in this annex are as follows.
B.3.1
Cloth length
Distance (length) measured from the first end to the last end in the dough length or vertical (machine advance)
. direction
B.3.2
Cloth full width
The distance between the ends of the dough, measured perpendicular to the length of the dough.
B.3.3
Effective width of cloth
The width of the fabric, excluding ears, marks, pinholes or non-homogeneous tissue.
Note The definition of the effective width differs depending on the agreement between the delivery party and the end use (end use) or specificat
May be.
B.4 principle
In the standard condition at the time of testing, the dough sump was conditioned, conditioned and conditioned in a relaxed, unstrained condition.
Spread over a smooth plane.
Use a calibrated ruler (ruler) to measure the length and width. When measuring the length,
Measure the length and calculate the total length from the sum of the lengths of the parts.
83
L 1096： 2010
sampling
B.5
The sample shall be selected according to the procedure described in the material specifications for the dough or by agreement between the parties.
B.6 apparatus
B.6.1 Calibrated ruler (ruler)
ISO 10012 According to the standard, the width of the fabric or the scale longer than 1 m, whichever is longer, in millimeter (mm) increments
There is.
B.6.2 Measuring table
The width and length are larger than the fabric to be measured, and the surface is smooth. The platform can measure samples longer than 2 m.
At least 3 m long.
Marks shall be continuously placed at 1 m ± 1 mm intervals along the longitudinal parallel ends of the table.
The first mark shall be 0.5 m from the front edge of the table so that the sample can be properly placed.
For a long piece of cloth that is divided and measured part by part, the whole piece of cloth shall be placed on a table while the length of each part
( Annex BA reference)
.
B.7 Standard condition during conditioning

The standard conditions for preconditioning, temperature and humidity
ISOcontrol
139 Comply
and testing
withare
theasprovisions
follows: of
The dough shall be subjected to temperature control, conditioning, conditioning and measurement in a relaxed, unstrained state.
In order to ensure a relaxed and unstrained state, either the entire width or the center of the width should be folded in two or cylindrical.
The sample shall be placed in such a manner that no tension is applied to the sample.
Note Illustration of how to handle long fabrics,
Annex BA Shown in
Preliminary markings are made on two sections along the fabric to confirm that they have reached a relaxed / relaxed state.
Measure the distance between the marks at 24 hour intervals.
May be regarded as having A place to measure after performing special treatment instead of receiving the knitted fabric
In that case, it shall be done by agreement between the delivery and delivery parties, and that shall be stated in the test report.
B.8 operation
B.8.1 General
Spread the sample flat on the measuring table. The test shall be performed in the form of a two-fold or cylindrical winding at the full width and cen
Do not twist the fabric itself.
B.8.2 Measuring sample length
B.8.2.1 Samples less than 1 m
For samples less than 1 meter (m) in length, place a ruler parallel to the longitudinal edge and measure millimeters (mm)
Measure up to the unit. Repeat the total length three times at different points in the width direction.
B.8.2.2 Samples of 1 m or more
Mark the edges of the dough. B.6.2 Using a mark on the measuring table as specified in
Place a mark. Mark continuously for each 1 m increment over the entire length of the sample. Last 1 m not remaining
Full length B.6.1 Measure with the calibrated ruler specified in. The total length of the sample is the length added every 1 m
And the last remaining length. If necessary, measure three times with new markers placed on the sample
repeat.
84
L 1096： 2010
The tester shall decide in advance whether to include the length of the joint at the leading and trailing ends of the sample.
I have to.
B.8.3 Measuring sample width
The width of the dough expanded to the full width shall be the distance (length) between the outermost ends measured at right angles to both ends.
The width of the dough folded in half at the center should be from the end of the folded part to both ends where it is properly overlapped.
Bend and double the distance (length) measured perpendicular to the end.
If both ends are not properly overlapped, measure from the bent end to the closest end and report to that effect.
In the book. The width of the dough rolled into a cylinder should be such that the sample is placed properly and both ends are kept flat.
The distance (length) between both ends measured at right angles to both ends in this state. Measure at even intervals over the entire length of the sam
− 5 Sample length up to m ： 5 times measurement
− 20 Sample length up to m ： Measure 10 times
− 20 Samples longer than m : Measured at least 10 times at 2 m intervals
If the full width from end to end is not measured, the tester shall negotiate a definition of the effective width and test accordingly.
Record in the test report.
When measuring the effective width, measure according to the
B.3.3 Exclude
full width,
ears and edges described in. Effective width is woven
Depending on the type of weaving / variation or on the special requirements of making clothing or other ready-made products.
Definitions may differ.
B.9 Calculation and display of results

B.9.1 Cloth length
The arithmetic mean of the length (measurement) of the sample is calculated to the centimeter (cm). Fluctuate as needed
Calculate coefficients to the nearest 1% and 95% confidence limits to the nearest centimeter, or send individual measurements
Display to the nearest thimetre.
B.9.2 Cloth width
The arithmetic mean of the sample width (measurement) is calculated to the centimeter. Coefficient of variation 1% if necessary
Calculate to the nearest centimeter and the 95% confidence limit.
B.10 Test report

a) general information
1) To the effect of this annex. For example,
ISO Standard number, issue year, and test date
2) Sample identification and collection procedures
3) Description of sample shape (full width, center folded, cylindrical winding) and test after performing special treatment
Deviations from prescribed test procedures
Four)
b) Sample length
1) Arithmetic mean in meters
2) Coefficient of variation (%) and 95% confidence limits (m) or individual measurements (m) as appropriate
3) Description. For example, the length of one end was different because one end was extended.
Part added to the measurement
Description
c) Sample width
85
L 1096： 2010
1) Explanation of whether the measurement width is full width, effective width, width based on another definition and agreement
2) Arithmetic mean in meters
3) Coefficient of variation expressed as a percentage and 95% confidence limits expressed in meters (m), as appropriate
Minimum width in meters
Four)
86
L 1096： 2010
Annex BA
(reference)
Temperature and humidity control / conditioning, relaxation treatment and
How to place cloth for measurement
A long piece of cloth that is fully exposed to the atmosphere of temperature control, humidity control and conditioning in a relaxed, unstrained stat
A convenient and effective way to place is to spread the cloth and gently undulate it to the appropriate size (Figure BA.1
reference)
.
During the measurement with the mark, place the cloth piece whose width is to be measured on the measuring table so that tension is not applied.
Is important. For this purpose, the ends of the piece of cloth that is spread out beyond the part to Figure BA.2
be measured
like
It is convenient to make a cuttle-fold and stack each end of the part to be measured.
If the table is too short to use this method, it must be at the same height so that it is a continuous rectangular surface with the table.
In this case, auxiliary tables having at least the same width can be used at both ends of the measuring table.
Figure BA.1
− Loose folding Figure BA.2
− Cutle-shaped folding
87
L 1096： 2010
Annex C
(normative)
Textile products-Textiles-Measurement of unit length and mass per unit area
This annex was issued as the first edition in 1977 ISO 3801 , Textiles-Woven fabrics-Determination of
It was created based on mass per unit length and mass per unit area without changing the technical contents.
The mass per unit area and mass per unit length of woven fabric can be measured by more than one method.
May be specified.
For some doughs, the mass per unit length and the mass per unit area are only related to the dough width.
But Fabrics that change in structure (either the ears or the body of the fabric) have a mass per unit area and unit length
There is an important distinction between mass and mass. It is important to consider the best possible method and select the method that is appropriat
Important when testing large patterned fabrics, MethodThe
5 size of the specimen used for the test may not be sufficient
Special attention should be paid to this.
In these cases, it is not appropriate to discuss in this way. A fabric sample or specimen (ie, a fixed length
The material in the consignment, ie the piece of cloth (normal production unit).
You have to choose which way you are.
If cut pieces are used as a representative of a batch of piece of fabric, the exact dimensions and size of
It is recommended that the test results of the sample be used for mass. The choice of the dough weight measurement method depends on the situation
There are many.
Given that each method is the only standard method more accurate than the others,It cannot be justified.
Therefore, under specific circumstances, select the mass per unit length and the mass per unit area,
It is desirable to select a method suitable for the method or the piece of cloth.
C.1 Scope of application

C.1.1 This annex specifies how to make the following measurements:
a) Mass per unit length
b) Mass per unit area
These are measured on woven fabrics prepared under the test standard conditions.
C.1.2 The method includes full-width or center-folded textile fabrics (including stretchable),types).
Can be applied to
Complete cloths can be applied to the measurement of the mass of the dough as well as the measurement of the sample.
C.2 Reference standards
). supplements).
ISO 22198 , Textiles−Fabrics−Determination of width and length
C.3 principle
C.3.1 Method 1 and Method 3
88
L 1096： 2010
Prepare a piece of cloth or a fixed length sample under the standard conditions for testing, measure the length and mass of the dough, and determin
Calculate the quantity or, in relation, measure the length, width and mass of the dough and calculate the mass per unit area.
If it is impractical to adjust the whole piece to the test standard, reduce the length (and width) and mass of the piece.
Measure after relaxation in general atmosphere, calculate mass per unit length (mass per unit area), and correct
The value corrected by applying the coefficient is obtained. The correction factor is the length of the specific part cut from the piece of cloth after rela
Width) and mass are measured first in the surrounding general atmosphere, then in the standard state of the test, and the ratio of these values is used.
Is decided.
C.3.3 Method 5
If a small sample needs to be tested, a small sample taken from this sample will be in water equilibrium under standard conditions.
And measure the mass per unit area. In this case, take a test piece of known size, weigh it,
Calculate the mass per unit area.
C.4 apparatus
C.4.1 Graduated steel ruler
3 m long (more than 2 m if not available) with centimeter and millimeter scales
so, Method, 1Method, 2Methodas3well
Method 4 for
as Used
C.4.2 Utensil
It can make a full width test piece cut at right angles to the ear. , 1Method, 2Methodas3well
Method as Used
Method 4 for
C.4.3 Balance
Method
Fabric that can measure the mass of a piece of cloth or a fixed length sample with an accuracy 5
of ± about,
0.2% of the measured mass.
Requires an accuracy of 0.001 g.
C.4.4 table
The surface must be smooth, larger than the width of the fabric to be measured, and at least 4 m long.
C.4.5 Utensil
Two
Cut to 10 cm x 10 cm size or 100 cm Can be cut to 1% accuracy on a circularMethod 5 in
surfaceUsed
of
What can be done.
C.4.6 Metal plate
Two
Approximately 9 cm wide square (orUsing
80 cma disk), 1 cm thick, MethodWhat
5 can be used for
C.5 Standard condition for adjustment and test

The standard conditions for adjustment andThe
ISO 139 testing
standard
are: condition specified in. Standard condition is relative humidity (65 ± 4)%,
The temperature is 20 ° C ± 2 ° C.
Note In tropical areas, a temperature of 27 ° C ± 2 ° C may be used by agreement between the parties.
C.6 operation
C.6.1 Preliminary adjustment
Moisture balance should be approached from the dry side. It is difficult to get the dough as soon as possible
If this is not the case, the dough should be exposed to the atmosphere at a temperature of 50 ° C or less and a relative humidity of 10% or less, and pr
The difference weighed continuously at the above intervals is such that the final mass of the dough when adjusted in this atmosphere is 0.5% or less.
89
L 1096： 2010
Is considered to have reached the water equilibrium in the preliminary adjustment.

C.6.2 ear
The mass per unit length (or area) of the ear is significantly different from the mass per unit length (or area) of the dough
In this case, the mass per unit area shall be measured and calculated on a sample with the ear removed along the outermost warp of the body.
Is calculated based on the mass of the sample excluding the ears and its length and width.
C.6.3 Method 1
Measurement of the mass per unit length of a piece of cloth or a fixed length sample that can be adjusted under the standard conditions for testing.
C.6.3.1 Cloth
Annex B( ISO 22198 ), Measure the length of the adjusted cloth, and then (without taking it out of the standard state)
Weigh. Alternatively, it is impossible or impossible to measure the length of the piece of cloth, if possible
0.5 m or more, preferably 3 m to 4 m C.6.3.2 Measured using the method described in
C.6.3.2 Sample of fixed length
C.6.3.2.1 Make sure to cut the entire width of the piece of fabric along the ears and parallel
The sample
lines atlength
right angles,
is 0.5 m or more,
If possible, make it 3 m to 4 m.
C.6.3.2.2 Annex B ( ISO 22198 ), Measure the length of the adjusted sample, and then remove it from the standard condition.
Measure the weighing capacity.
C.6.4 Method 2
Perform in standard condition for testing The measurement of the mass per unit length of a piece of fabric when it is impractical to adjust.
Annex B( ISO 22198 ), Measure the length of the piece after relaxation in the general atmosphere, and then in the same atmosphere.
Weigh. As far as possible, the width from the center of the piece should be at least 1 m, preferably 3 m to 4 m.
And measure the mass and length in the general atmosphere. Rapid changes in temperature and / or humidity of the atmosphere
At the same time, measure the mass of the piece and the mass of a fixed length sample in the same atmosphere in order to minimize the effects of this
next C.6.3.2.2 According to the operation specified in.
C.6.5 Method 3
Measurement of the mass per unit area of a piece of cloth or a fixed length that can be adjusted under the standard conditions for testing.
C.6.5.1 Cloth
C.6.3.1 By the operation shown in Annex B ( ISO 22198 ) Measure the adjusted width.
C.6.5.2 Sample of fixed length
C.6.3.2 By the operation shown in Annex B ( ISO 22198 ) Measure the adjusted width.
C.6.6 Method 4
Measurement of mass per unit area of piece of cloth when it is not practical to adjust under standard conditions for testing.
MethodThe
2 width of the piece of cloth after relaxation in a general atmosphere and the test after relaxation and adjustment under standard condition
Charge range
Annex B ( ISO 22198 ).
C.6.7 Method 5
Measurement of mass per unit area using small specimens.
C.6.7.1 Test sample
Select as much as possible from the representative of the whole fabric, avoiding wrinkles and ears.
Collect 5 large samples (unless otherwise specified). Surfaces with significantly different masses per unit area
For fabrics with large handles, such as those containing a stack, collect a sample to include an integral multiple of one full handle.
You.
90
L 1096： 2010
C.6.7.2 operation
C.6.1 The sample is preliminarily adjusted. Expose to the test standard without tension for at least 24 hours,
Allow sample to equilibrate with water. Turn each sample over and place it on a surface that is suitable for cutting. In the center of the sample
Two
Place a metal plate, position the cutter, and place a square test piece of about 10 cm x 10 cm (or 100 cm).
Round test
Cut into pieces). Weigh the test specimen with an accuracy of ± 0.001 g, taking care not to cause thread fraying.
C.7 Result calculation

Two
Mass per unit length (g / m) and / or mass per unit area (g / m ) Is calculated by the following equation.
m
mul = c
lc
mc
mua =
l c × Wc
here, mul :
Mass per unit length of cloth or sample after(Gadjustment
/ m) under standard conditions for testing (with or
mua :
Two
Mass per unit area of cloth or sample after adjustment
(G / m ) under standard conditions for testing (with or w
mc : Mass of fabric or sample after adjustment under standard conditions for testing (with or
without ears ) (G)
lc : Length of fabric or sample after adjustment in standard condition for test (m)
Wc : Fabric or width of the sample after adjustment test standard conditions (及may include ear
may not include beauty)
(M)
The result is rounded to the nearest whole number in grams.
Attached
C.7.2.1 From the data of the relaxed dough, the relaxed sample, and the adjusted sample, determine the adjusted length of the cloth.
Book( BISO 22198 ).
C.7.2.2 When measuring the mass per unit area, calculate in the same way, but adjust the width of the cloth B( ISO
Annex
22198 )by.
C.7.2.3 The adjusted mass (g) of the piece of cloth is calculated by the following formula.
msc
mc = mr ×
ms
here, mc : Mass of cloth after adjustment under standard conditions for testing (g)
mr : Mass of cloth after relaxation in general atmosphere (g)
msc : Weight of sample (g) adjusted under standard conditions for testing
ms : Mass of sample after relaxation in general atmosphere (g)
C.7.2.4 C.7.2.3 It was determined
c Using
fromthemvalueC.7.1
of Mass per unit length or quality per unit area as
Calculate the amount.
C.7.2.5 The result is rounded to the nearest whole number in grams.
C.7.3 Method 5
From the mass of the test piece, calculate the mass per unit area of the dough by the following formula.
mua = M x 100
Where m ua : Mass per unit area of fabric after adjustment under standard conditions for testing
Two
(g / m )
91
L 1096： 2010
m : Mass of test piece (g)

Find the average of the five calculations.
The result is rounded to the nearest whole number in grams.
C.8 Test report
a) To the effect of this annex. For example,
b) If multiple specimens are tested, the results for each specimen
c) Date when the test was conducted
Two
d) Average mass per unit length (g / m) and / or average mass per unit area (g / m )
e) How each result was obtainedMethod
( , 1Method, 2Method, 3MethodOr4 Method) 5
f) Whether to include ears in this result
g) Details of deviation from the prescribed operation
92
L 1096： 2010
Annex D
(normative)
Textile-Textile-Structure-Analytical method-Fabric per unit area
Measurement of warp and weft mass
Methods of analysis-Part 6: Determination of the mass of warp and weft per unit area of fabric
It was created without changing the contents.
For fabrics, the mass per unit area [ Annex C ( ISO 3801 ) See] and fresh per centimeter
It is common practice to define the number of yarns and wefts. However, this is the warp and weft in the fabric
The ratio has not been determined. Even if the apparent fineness of yarn is not specified, warp and weft yarns per unit area
Indicate the desired balance between the warp and the weft by indicating the value of each mass.
Can be.
D.1 Scope of application

This annex provides a method for measuring the weight of warp and weft yarns per unit area of fabric after removal of non-fiber substances
Is defined.
D.2 Reference standards

). supplements).
ISO 3801 , Textiles-Woven fabrics-Determination of mass per unit length and mass per unit area
ISO 1833-1 , Textiles-Quantitative chemical analysis-Part 1: General principles of testing
D.3 principle
D.3.1 Method A
Mark the outer shape of the piece of dough that breaks down into warp and weft in a square or rectangular shape. The marked parts are
Since the non-fibrous material is removed while still forming part of the large sample dough, the yarn is not reduced. Non-textile
When measuring the amount of fibrous material, this large sample should be a square with a diagonal parallel to each yarn direction of the dough.
If the amount of non-fibrous material is not measured, the large sample may be of any shape or size.
D.3.2 B method
A test piece of known area is disintegrated into warp and weft. Non-fibrous material is removed from the warp and weft.
D.4 Utensil
D.4.1 Marking ink that does not disappear
D.4.2 Scissors
D.4.3 Disassembly needle
D.4.4 Small template
93
L 1096： 2010
150 cmTwo
Marking or punching a square or rectangle of known area. To the width of the rectangle
The ratio of length to length shall be 4 times or less. A suitable template is approximately 15.8 cm x 15.8 cm. this
The mass (g) of the yarn multiplied by 40 indicates the number of grams per square meter.
D.4.5 Large template
A sufficiently large square shall be marked or stamped. This square is a small ten
plate( D.4.4 Square) or large enough to enclose the area marked
Each side of the rectangle is arranged parallel to the diagonal of this square.
D.4.6 Balance
One that has an accuracy of 0.1% of the minimum unit to be weighed.
D.5 Standard condition for adjustment and test

The standard conditions for adjustment and The
ISO 139 testing
standard
are: condition specified in. Used for sample preparation and testing.
D.6 Test pieces

D.6.1 Adjustment
Before marking or cutting, expose the sample from which the specimen is taken to the calibration standard until water equilibrium is achieved.
Keep it. Next, test specimens are collected from each sample.
D.6.2 Method A
Large template ( D.4.5 Using a square with diagonal lines in the warp and weft directions.
Mark with a pencil on top. At the center of this square is a small template ( D.4.4 Use warp yarns and wefts
Marking ink that does not erase a square or rectangle with each side in the direction of the
D.4.1 Mark).
thread
Hasa
(
Mi ( D.4.2 Cut out a large square from the sample using Ref.) And check the warp and weft directions. Or that
Instead, take a large square from the sample using punching.
If it is not necessary to measure the amount of non-fibrous material, the area where the yarn is marked inside during removal of this material
The large specimen may be of any shape or size, as long as it remains
D.6.3 B method
Small template ( D.4.4 ) And warp yarns and weft yarns so that each side is as parallel as possible.
Mark a square or rectangle with a pencil.Scissors
( D.4.2 reference)
Cut a square or rectangle from the dough using
Check the warp and weft directions. Or alternatively, use punches to cut out the appropriate size squares from the dough.
Collect.
D.7 operation
D.7.1 Method A
ISO 1833-1 Remove non-fibrous material from the sample by the method specified in The sample is adjusted until water equilibrium is reached.
Settle and expose to standard conditions for testing. Mark on the sample before removal of the applied substance, inside square or long
Cut along each side of the rectangle. Measure the mass of the marked part with an accuracy of 0.1%.
Place on a suitable piece of colored paper to make it easier to see the yarn and fiber fragments from the fabric under test before
Begins to unravel the thread from one end of the rectangle. Then, remove the thread that has come loose easily from the fabric.
Stop and collect. Occasionally cut off the fringe of thread remaining in the other direction of the dough and cut its short length
Collect them together and keep them separate from the easily unraveled thread.
94
L 1096： 2010
When the entire marked part is disassembled into warp and weft, the mass of the warp and weft separately with an accuracy of 0.1%.
Is measured. The sum of the two masses shall not differ by more than 1% from the mass of the dough before decomposition. Warp yarn and
If the total weight of the weft differs from the weight of the piece of fabric by more than 1%, this operation must be performed in a sufficiently accura
It can be said that it was. Repeat this operation to reach the required accuracy.
Note Long rectangular specimens are easier to disassemble than square specimens. However, when decomposing a square,
Cut the thread into several rectangles with the long side in the direction of the thread where the thread is easily loosened from the ground
And can be easily disassembled.
D.7.2 B method
To make it easier to see the yarn fragments from the fabric being tested, place them on a piece of colored paper
Decomposes into warp and weft. After disassembly of the specimen
ISO 1833-1 Warp yarns and yarns according to the method specified in
The non-fibrous material is separately removed from the yarn. Care is taken so that the fibers do not decrease during this process.
The yarn is pre-dried, and the dried yarn is roughly exposed to a standard condition to obtain a moisture equilibrium at the test standard condition.
I do. The masses of the two sets of yarn are measured separately with an accuracy of 0.1%.
D.8 Calculation and display of results

From the masses of the warp and weft yarns after removal of the substance and moisture equilibrium, and the known area of the decomposed speci
Two
Weight of warp, weft and fabric per unit area (g / m ) Is calculated.
D.9 Test report

b) Standard conditions used (normal or tropical temperature)
c) The method usedA( Law
Or B Law)
d) Method used to remove non-fibrous materials
e) The weight of warp and weft yarns per unit area of each test piece and, if necessary, the
Mass (g / mTwo
)
f) Details of deviation from the prescribed operation
95
L 1096： 2010
Annex E
(Regulation)
Textile products-thickness measurement of fabrics and textile products
This annex was issued as the second edition in 1996. ISO 5084 , Textiles-Determination of thickness of textiles
It was created based on and textile products without changing the technical content.
E.1 Scope of application

This annex specifies a method for measuring the thickness of fabrics and textiles under specified pressure. However,
Not applicable to textile floor coverings, non-woven fabrics, geotextiles and coated fabrics with specific Japanese Industrial Standards
Absent(Annex EA reference)
.
E.2 Reference standards

). supplements).
ISO 10012 , Measurement management systems-Requirements for measurement processes and measuring
equipment
E.3 Terms and definitions

The main terms and definitions used in this annex are as follows.
E.3.1
Textile thickness
Vertical distance between two plates when the textile is subjected to a pressure of 1 kPa or less.
E.4 principle
The thickness of the test piece shall be determined by applying a specified pressure to the reference plate on which the test piece is placed and the t
It is measured as the distance between the circular presser foot when added.
The specimen is placed between two reference plates and a known pressure is applied to the specimen. After a specified time
Measure and record the vertical distance between the reference plates.
E.5 apparatus
E.5.1 Thickness tester
How to check the thickness tester
ISO 10012 by. The thickness tester incorporates (or equips) the following equipment:
Shall be.
E.5.1.1 Replaceable presser foot
Two Two
A size suitable for the type of fabric to be tested. 2 000 mm for the test ± 20 mm Size pressa foot
Is desirable. This corresponds to a presser foot with a diameter of 50.5 mm ± 0.2 mm Annex
( EA reference)
. Other
If a large size is used, agreements between the delivery and delivery parties shall be recorded in the test report.
96
L 1096： 2010
E.5.1.2 Reference plate

Pressa foot ( E.5.1.1 Larger than 50 mm in diameter and the upper surface is smooth.
E.5.1.3 Presser foot moving device (Moves vertically to the upper surface of the reference plate)
The moving surface of the presser foot is the reference plate (E.5.1.2 (See above)
Apply a pressure of 1 kPa ± 0.01 kPa and 0.1 kPa ± 0.001 kPa to the test piece placed on the reference plate.
What can be Annex EA reference)
.
E.5.1.4 Thickness gauge
Pressa foot ( E.5.1.1 Moving surface and reference plate (see E.5.1.2 Distance)
One that can be measured with an accuracy of 0.01 mm.
E.5.2 Stopwatch
E.6 Standard condition for adjustment and test

The standard conditions for adjustment and Standard
ISO 139 testing are:
condition specified in. Used for sample preparation and testing.
, Selection and adjustment

E.7 Sample collection
E.7.1 Take an appropriate sample by one of the following methods.
a) According to the instructions given in the relevant material standards.
b) If such instructions are not in the material specification, the procedure shall be in accordance with the agreement between the parties.
E.7.2 EA.3 To select a test site from the sample. For example, unstable and sensitive like certain knit fabrics
About the dough, EA.3 Cut the test piece. For wide fabrics that cannot be handled without distortion,
Cut the specimen.
E.7.3 Adjust the relaxed sample and test piece until they are in equilibrium with the test standard.
Note The sample should be allowed to relax for at least 16 hours.
E.8 operation
E.8.1 Pressa foot ( E.5.1.1 Reference plate) E.5.1.2 Clean). Pre
Check that the shaft is free to move. Presser foot to apply specified pressure to reference plate
Put. And the thickness gauge ( E.5.1.4 Set the scale to zero. The applied pressure should be 1 kPa ± 0.01 kPa.
Good.
E.8.2 Raise the presser foot and, if there is no tension or distortion, and the measurement site is within 150 mm of the ear,
Place the sample or test piece on the reference plate so that it does not fall. The part to be measured should be free of wrinkles.
E.8.3 Lower the presser foot slowly onto the test specimen and read and record the gauge after 30 s ± 5 s.
E.8.4 E.8.2 as well as According to the operation of 5 or more different parts of the sample, or 5 or more test
E.8.3 pieces (
Annex
EA Measure the thickness).
E.9 View results

With an accuracy of 0.01 mm,
E.8 Calculate the average of the values measured by the above. Fluctuation rate down to 0.1% and 95%
Calculate the minimum required interval to 0.01 mm.
97
L 1096： 2010
E.10 Test report

b) Description of the fabric. Where appropriate, the width of the narrow fabric
c) Presser foot size used
d) Applied pressure
e) Number of tests
f) The thickness of the fabric or fiber product is represented by the average value (mm). If necessary, coefficient of variation (%) and 95% confidenc
Indicates (E.9 reference)
.
g) Departures from the prescribed procedures and the reasons therefor, by agreement between the parties or otherwise
98
L 1096： 2010
Annex EA
(Regulation)
Selection of test area and presser foot size and applied pressure
EA.1 Pressa foot

E.5.1.1 If the recommended presser foot size is not used, either:
Two Two
a) For narrow fabrics, for example fabrics with an effective width of 50 mm or less, the±size
1 mmshould
Andbethis is,
Equivalent to a circular presser foot with a diameter of 11.28 mm ± 0.5 mm.
Two Two
b) For other fabrics, the size is 10 000 mm ± 100 mm And This is a circle with a diameter of 112.84 mm ± 0.5 mm
Equivalent to a presser foot of
EA.2 Pressure to apply

E.8.1 If the pressures recommended in the above are not used, for example, piles or traps and some knits
Use 0.1 kPa ± 0.001 kPa for dough.
EA.3 Test site

Determine the position of the test site or specimen
FigureonEA.1
Shown
the sample.
in
Unit: mm
Figure EA.1
− Test site or specimen position
99
L 1096： 2010
Annex EB
(Reference)
References
The relevant standards for measuring the thickness of fiber floor coverings, nonwoven fabrics and geotextiles are as follows.
ISO 1765 : 1986, Machine-made textile floor coverings-Determination of thickness

ISO 9073-2 : 1995, Textiles-Test methods for nonwovens-Part 2: Determination of thickness
ISO 9863-1 : 2005, Geosynthetics-Determination of thickness at specified pressures-Part 1: Single layers
ISO 9863-2 : 1996, Geotextiles and geotextile-related products−Determination of thickness at specified pressures
−Part 2: Procedure for determination of thickness of single layers of multilayer products
100
L 1096： 2010
Annex F
(Regulation)
Textile products-Textiles-Structure-Analytical methods-Measurement of the number of yarn
Methods of analysis-Part 2: Change technical content based on Determination of number of threads per unit length
It was created without.
F.1 Scope of application

This annex specifies three methods for measuring the number of yarns per centimeter of fabric. next
The choice of method may use any of the three methods depending on the properties of the fabric. If youAhave
byany objections,
Law
It is desirable.
a) A LawDecomposes woven fabric, suitable for all woven fabrics. This is the most labor-intensive method,
Less restrictions than the method of In particular, it is most suitable for measuring multi-layered structures and complicated weaves.
ing.
b) B Suitable for more
Method (woven cloth decomposing than 50 fabrics per centimeter.
mirror)
c) C Suitable for
Method [mobile thread number measuring instrument all fabrics.
(stereo microscope)]
If the number of yarns per centimeter is small, it is convenient to display the result as the number of yarns per 10 cm.
It is profitable.
Note The method using parallel and tapered densimeters Annex FA Shown in These methods are
Although not considered to be of sufficient accuracy to be used as a standard test method, it is considered a routine test.
It can be used to determine approximate numbers and to conduct preliminary tests.
F.2 Reference standards

F.3 principle
Three methods for measuring the number of yarns per centimeter are specified, and any method can be used.
The choice depends on the properties of the fabric. The principle is as follows.
a) A Law F.4The number of yarns is counted by decomposing a woven fabric of a certain size by the method shown in (1). The thread to count is s
It is well separated and 1 cm to 2 cm is appropriate.
b) B LawCount the number of threads that can be observed within the specified range of the scale plate of the textile disassembling mirror.
c) C LawThe number of yarns per centimeter of the fabric is measured with a mobile yarn counter (stereo microscope).
F.4 Minimum measurement section

Table Use
F.1 the appropriate minimum measurement interval specified in.
101
L 1096： 2010
Table −F.1
Minimum measurement section
Number of yarns per cm Minimum measurement
Numbersection
of yarns per test piece accuracy %
cm Book (Error range: 0.5 lines)
Less than 10 10 Less than 100 More than 0.5
10-25 5 50-125 1.0-1.4
More than 25 and less than 40Three 75-120 0.7-0.4
More than 40 2 More than 80 and less than 0.6
In this section, a test piece with 100 or more yarns is collected. For narrow fabrics 10 cm or less in width, both ears
A Law
The total width of the yarn including the yarn is counted, and the result is expressed as the number of yarns per full width. The pattern fabric has a co
Are at least one complete organization ( F.10 Select the test piece containing
F.5 Standard condition for adjustment and test

ISO 139 testing
standard
F.6 Test pieces

A Law
It is not necessary to prepare special test pieces except forF.7.2
( reference)
， Represent as much of the dough as possible
Select five or more different places like this and count the yarn. Before testing, keep the test standard for at least 16 hours.
Expose the dough or test specimen.
F.7 Method A Disassembly of woven fabric

F.7.1 Utensil
F.7.1.1 Clamp
Two short pins are provided in parallel, and the distance betweenF.4
theWithin
pins is± 0.02 cm of minimum measurement section specified in
Is the error range of
Replacement if clamps are not available.
F.7.1.2 Decomposition needle 2 this
F.7.1.3 Heavy steel ruler
F.7.2 operation
F.4 5 test specimens 0.4 cm to 0.6 cm larger than the minimum measurement interval specified in
Collect at random ( F.6 reference)
. In this case, especially in the case of a woven fabric having a coarse texture, be careful not to disturb the yarn arrang
Be careful.
Clamp 0.2 cm to 0.3 cm inside from both ends of the test F.7.1.1
piece ( See) pin. Outside of two pins
In the direction of counting the shorter thread of The yarn in the measuring section of the fabric inside the pin
next,
is left as it is.
Loosen the shorter yarn of the measuring section from the test piece and count the number of yarns. The number of pins stuck is counted as 1/2.
Usually, it is convenient to use a single pointed forceps to loosen the thread. Every 10 loosened threads
Collecting them is convenient for later counting.
Alternatively, if a clamp is not available, a heavy steel ruler at the end of the fabric ( F.7.1.3 See)
Mark the appropriate scale and place two disassembly needles ( F.7.1.2 Reference) and insert the
A method of loosening the thread may be used.
102
L 1096： 2010
F.8 Method B Textile decomposition mirror

F.8.1 Utensil
F.8.1.1 Woven decomposing mirror
The width of the scale plate shall be 2 cm ± 0.005 cm or 3 cm ± 0.005 cm on all sides, and the thickness of the edge of the scale plate shall be
The height shall not exceed 0.1 cm.
F.8.2 operation
F.4 Use the minimum measurement interval specified in. Place the fabric flat on a flat surface,
Textile disassembly mirror on the fabric so that it is parallel to the
F.8.1.1 See).
warp
In the
( woven fabric, all yarns are observed,
Count, but if you cannot, count the complete organization.
Select one easily identifiable thread in the complete structure, and place the scale dissolving mirror so that one side of the scale plate is adjacent to
Put. The number and the number of fractional yarns in the measurement section are counted. The number of threads in a complete tissue degrades the
Or loosen the fabric. Number of warp yarns or complete sets of sections cut by the opposite sides of the scale plate
Either count the number of weaves, or count the number of repetitions in warp units and the fraction of yarn in one unit.
In the same way, fill the scale plate of the weaving mirror with the weft in parallel with the weft.
Count the number of complete weaves or the number of weft repeats.
Textiles, such as certain types of cross-weaving and satin weaving, whose surface is exclusively made up of yarn, can be easily structured.
If you count on the back that can be confirmed, it is relatively easy to understand.
F.9 C- method mobile thread counting instrument (stereo microscope)

F.9.1 Utensil
F.9.1.1 Mobile thread counting instrument (stereo microscope)
An instrument equipped with a low-magnification magnifier from 4x to 20x. Turn theF.4
knob to turn the
Minimum magnifier. area specified in
measurement
Move laterally on the scale a sufficient distance to fill the gap. Eyepieces with marked lines
With a pointer that moves with the magnifying glass as the knob rotates, or that can be observed through the magnifying glass
Anything is fine.
F.9.2 operation
F.4 Use the minimum measurement interval specified in. Place the fabric flat on a flat surface, and count in the direction of counting.
Turning the knob on the magnifying glass will move the fabric parallel to the warp or weft depending on the direction of the yarn counted by the mag
As shown in the figure, F.9.1.1 On the fabric). Next, rotate the knob to the specified minimum measurement.
Count the number of yarns in a fixed section.
Observe all the threads that pass when the pointer or marker is moved over the fabric, and ask for countable fabrics.
There is no problem, but for woven fabrics that cannot do this, the number of complete structures should be counted. Easy identification within a com
Count from one thread you can. Count the number of complete fabrics and fractional yarns in the measurement section. Number of yarns of complete
Is determined by decomposing the tissue or loosening the fabric.
Textiles, such as certain types of cross-weaving and satin weaving, whose surface is exclusively made up of yarn, can be easily structured.
If you count on the back that can be confirmed, it is relatively easy to understand.
F.10 Calculation and display of results

Calculate the number of yarns per centimeter. For each direction, it is expressed as the average of the measured values. That is,
The number of warp yarns per inch meter in the warpThe
direction,
number of weft yarns per centimeter is defined as the weft yarn direction.
103
L 1096： 2010
The number of yarns per square centimeter is the sum of the average values of the number of warp yarns and the number of weft yarns per centimeter
Total.
In the case of a woven fabric with a pattern between the yarns with uneven density, measure the number of yarns for each pattern and use centimete
Report the number of threads per bottle.
F.11 Test report

a) To the effect of this annex. For example,ISO Standard number, issue year, and test date
b) Standard conditions applied (normal or tropical temperature)
c) Method applied ( A Law
, B Law
Or )
C Law
d) Minimum measurement interval used
e) Number of measurements
f) Individual measurements per centimeter and average value per centimeter for warp and weft. Dense
In the case of a woven fabric with a pattern formed by a part with different degrees of density, if necessary, for each pattern, for each warp and w
Measurements and average values per centimeter.
For coarse density fabrics, the result may be expressed per 10 cm. Narrow width fabric (F.4 See)
Indicates the result by the number of yarns of the full width.
Two
g) If necessary, the number of yarns per square centimeter (or 100 cm Per)
h) Details of deviation from the prescribed operation
104
L 1096： 2010
Annex FA
(Regulation)
How to use tapered and parallel densimeters
FA.1 Method D (parallel type densimeter)

This method applies to woven fabrics that produce easily visible interference bands.
FA.1.1 principle
Measure the number of interference bands that appear when the parallel densitometer is placed on the fabric.
FA.1.2 apparatus
FA.1.2.1 Parallel type densimeter
10 cm or 20 cm length, within ± 5% of the number of yarns per centimeter of the fabric to be measured.
If there are several types of densimeters with different gauges, try them in advance and select the most suitable
select.
The lines engraved on the densimeter need to be straight and parallel to each other. Densimeter
The average number of lines per centimeter shall be calculated in units of 0.1.
The average number of lines per centimeter shall not differ by more than 0.15% from the total average number of lines.
You.
FA.1.3 operation
Select a suitable densitometer for the fabric and ensure that the line of the yarn and the densimeter in the direction of measurement are parallel.
Place on fabric. When choosing the right densimeter, Figure FA.1
Flat on the edge of the densitometer as shown
Many interference bands appear in the row. Count the number of bands at the center of the densitometer, and count the number of bands.
Divide by the data length (cm) to calculate the average number of bands per centimeter. Cm in accordance with the following method:
Add the number of bands per meter to the number of lines per centimeter of the densimeter, or
Subtract the number of bands per centimeter from the number of lines per centimeter of the meter.
If the interference bands appear to rotate in the same direction when the densimeter is rotated slightly,
Subtract the number of bands per centimeter from the number of lines per centimeter of the cincimeter. I
However, if the interference band rotates in the opposite direction to the densimeter,
Add the number of bands to the number of lines.
FA.1.4 Calculation and display of results
For fabrics for which the density cannot be determined directly in this test, calculate the number of yarns per centimeter. About each direction
And represent the average of the measured values. In other words, the number of warp yarns per centimeter
The number of weft threads per Torr is defined as the weft thread direction. The number of yarns per square centimeter is equivalent to centimeters.
It is the sum of the average values of the number of warp and weft yarns.
In the case of a woven fabric with a pattern between the yarns with uneven density, measure the number of yarns for each pattern and use centimete
It is good to record the number of yarns per needle.
FA.2 Method E taper type densimeter

This method applies to woven fabrics that produce easily visible interference fringes (streaks).
FA.2.1 principle
105
L 1096： 2010
The number of yarns is measured by observing an interference pattern that appears when the taper type densimeter is placed on the fabric.
FA.2.2 apparatus
FA.2.2.1 Tapered densimeter At a distance of 2.5 cm between two parallel scales,
Symmetrically arranged divergence
Consists of shape lines. This line shall be cut at equal intervals at right angles to the axis of symmetry. Corresponding scale
The scales of the scales are on the opposite side, and the scales draw a line from the scale of one scale to the corresponding scale of the other.
Lines and places considered to be considered are displayed as numerical values of constituent units. The scale is displayed with an accuracy of 0.5% o
Show. The degree of line divergence is the maximum and minimum number of lines per centimeter and the length of the scale.
(Cm) no difference of 4 times.
FA.2.3 operation
The yarn in the direction of measurement and the long side of the tapered densimeter are placed on the fabric so that they are parallel. Appropriate
When the meter is selected, the number of lines per centimeter of the densimeter
There is one place equal to the number. At this point, a symmetrical or curvilinear light and dark cross interference pattern appears.
You. The reading of the scale on the scale pointed to by the two short legs (limbs) of this cross is the number of threads per centimeter
Indicates a number. If this cross interference pattern is asymmetric, the scale reading at both ends pointed to by the short foot of the cross
Take the average. The interference pattern generated when measuring a woven fabric Figure
with 25 FA.2
yarns
Shown/ cm
in Scale
Other patterns may be seen at positions where the reading is a multiple or divisor of the number of yarns per centimeter,
These patterns are extremely thin, and there is almost no misjudgment as being correct.
In some cases, oblique weave patterns may be formed. In such cases, measure the short side of the densimeter.
It can be prevented by making it parallel to the yarn in the direction. It is important to note that the slanted lines made of yarn create a small angle.
This is particularly necessary for woven fabrics with a smooth surface, such as satin.
In general, good results are obtained by directing light rays along the direction in which the densitometer lines open. But when
Not necessarily. In particular, glossy fabrics do not always give good results.
Find the best conditions. In this case, transmitted light may be used.
FA.2.4 Calculation and display of results
For each direction, it is expressed as the average of the measured values. In other words, the number of warp yarns per centimeter
The weft direction per centimeter is the weft direction. The number of yarns per square centimeter is
The sum of the average values of the number of warp yarns and the number of weft yarns per inch meter shall be used. Depending on the area where
For patterned fabrics, measure the number of threads per pattern and record the number of threads per centimeter for each pattern
Is good.
106
L 1096： 2010
− Example of parallel type densimeter
Figure FA.1
Figure FA.2
− Example of taper type densimeter
107
L 1096： 2010
Annex G
(normative)
Textile products-Woven fabrics-Structures-Analytical methods-Measurement of shrinkage
Methods of analysis-Part 3: Based on the Determination of crimp of yarn in fabric, without changing the technical content
It has been achieved.
In woven fabrics, the interlacing of the yarns causes corrugations or shrinkage of both the warp and weft yarns. But
Therefore, for example, the distance between both ends of the warp yarn, as if it were woven in a piece of woven fabric, should be straightened.
The difference between the two lengths is used to measure weaving shrinkage. In this technique, weaved yarn
Need to be tensioned to make it straight. Theoretically, this tension is applied to all weaves without stretching the yarn.
It removes shrinkage, but this seems to be impossible in practice. Therefore, the initial load table ( Annex
GA See inevitable elongation or incomplete shrinkage that cannot be completely removed (and
Weaving shrinkage is ignored.
), To find the average of the two
Included. When testing woven fabrics, ensure that the test yarn is taken from a complete texture of the pattern.
There is.
G.1 Scope of application

This annex specifies a method for measuring the shrinkage of yarn in fabric. This method works for most textile fabrics.
Applicable. However, the shrinkage cannot be removed from the yarn under the specified initial load or is impractical.
It cannot be applied to woven fabrics manufactured by such methods.
G.2 Reference standards

G.3 Terms and definitions

The definitions of the main terms used in this annex are as follows.
G.3.1
Weave shrinkage
The average of the difference between the length of the straight thread and the distance between the ends of the thread in the fabric is expressed as
You.
G.3.2
Initial load
Minimum load on the yarn to remove the shrinkage caused by weaving.
G.4 principle
Unravel the yarn from a piece of woven fabric of known length. Straighten this thread under tension that changes according to its type and fineness
108
L 1096： 2010
And measure straight. The difference between the length of the straight thread and the distance between the ends of the thread in the fabric
Expressed as a percentage of the latter.
G.5 apparatus
G.5.1 Yarn straightening length measuring device
Horizontal or vertical equipment conforming to the following requirements:
a) Has two thread clamps, the clamp first closes one end of the back, and when closed, the grip surface is parallel
thing.
b) One that can change the distance between grips.
c) One that can measure the distance between grips.
d) A mark is drawn on the surface of one of the grips, and the shortest distance to the edge of the other grip is approximately 2.5.
mm, which can be observed when the grip is closed.
e) A thread that can apply the specified initial load to the thread through the gripper.
G.5.2 Ruler
As a straightening device for yarn, with a scale of the same length unit.
G.5.3 Disassembly needle
G.6 Standard condition for adjustment and test

ISO 139 testing
standard
G.7 Test pieces

Condition the sample for at least 16 hours. The adjusted fabric is laid flat without tension and without wrinkles. On the fabric
Take two long sides parallel to the thread and two long sides parallel to the weft.
Mark as Each fabric piece shall have at least 10 threads in the width direction, and the length shall be
At least 20 times that of the test piece. Combine the two short sides of each piece of rectangular fabric to make five flaps on the fabric.
Cut along one long side. The distance between the two short sides of the flap is measured in millimeters. In addition, weaving
If both measurements and fineness measurements need to be made, prepare a further horizontal piece of dough, all five different
It is necessary to confirm that the weft is collected on behalf of the weft package. All dough pieces should be as long as possible
The length should be approximately 250 mm, and the width should include at least 25 warp or weft yarns.
To do.
G.8 operation
G.8.1 Device settings
Use one of the thread clamps to remove as much of the fabric shrinkage from the specimen as possible without excessive stretching.
Stretching device
G.5.1 (Attach). When reporting the results, describe the initial load chosen. For certain types of yarn
The initial load Annex GA Are shown as guidelines.
G.8.2 Insertion of thread into device
DisassemblyG.5.3
needle
10)( with the outer yarn remaining at about 1 cm with the yarn still interlaced at both ends.
Slowly loosen from the center of the wrap. Hold the yarn as close as possible to prevent the yarn from returning
Loosen the end of one of the threads. Insert the thread end into one of the jaws of the device so that it protrudes slightly.
109
L 1096： 2010
No. Pull the thread under slight tension until the end coincides with the marked line and begin closing the jaws. Completely
Close the jaws (the thread between the marking line and the edge of the jaws is almost straight.
). Thread the other end from the dough
Loosen and insert in the same way into other grips.
G.8.3 Straight length of thread
Release the jaws so that the selected initial load is gradually applied. Measure between the marked lines on the gripper, and
Find the straight length of the thread in Torr.
G.8.4 Number of yarn
Repeat the measurement to obtain a straightened length of 10 threads from each of the 5 rectangular flaps.
G.9 Calculation and display of results

For each set of 10 threads, calculate the average straight length in millimeters. Weaving shrinkage ratio C [Example
For example, the difference between the average straight length and the length occupied by the yarn in the fabric (flap width) is expressed as a percen
Represent.
] Is based on the following equation.
L − L0
C= ×100
L0
here, C : Weaving shrinkage rate (%)
L : Average length of 10 yarns removed from the fabric (mm)
L0: Occupied length of yarn in fabric (flap width)
(Mm)
G.10 Test report

c) Fabric specimen length (flap width)
d) Initial load used
e) Average straight measured length for each set of 10 warp and weft yarns (mm)
f) Weaving shrinkage rate of each group
g) Average warp and weft shrinkage
h) Details of deviation from the prescribed operation
110
L 1096： 2010
Annex GA
(Regulation)
Initial load
Unless otherwise specified, the initial load used to straighten the yarn after loosening it from the fabric table
GA.1 Shown in
− Initial load
Table GA.1
a)
yarn Fineness tex Initial load cN
Cotton spun yarn 7 or 7 thinner thread (0.75 × tex value)
7 thicker thread (0.2 × tex value) + 4
Woolen or worsted 15-60 (0.2 × tex value) + 4
61-300 (0.07 × tex value) + 12
all
Man-made continuous filament (0.5 x tex value)
door yarn (non-textured yarn)
note 1 cN = 1 gf
a)
111
L 1096： 2010
Annex H
(normative)
Textile Products-Textiles-Structure-Analytical Methods-
Measurement of apparent fineness of yarn taken out of dough
Methods of analysis-Part 5: Determination of linear density of yarn removed from fabric
It was created without any further changes.
The method of measuring the apparent fineness of yarn extracted from a woven fabric differs from the measurement of yarn extracted from a yarn p
Different. In the case of yarn from woven fabric, take into account the shrinkage imparted to the yarn by the interlacing of warp and weft yarns.
I have to. In addition, the length corresponding to the yarn extracted from the yarn package and used for the test is
Sometimes not collected. The results obtained may be significant unless standard methods are used and sufficient samples are taken.
May be subject to personal errors.
this Annex H Are divided into four chapters. Chapteras1well as Deals
Chapter
Chapter with items applicable to both methods.
4 Chapter
U. ChapterSpecifies
2 Chapter Chapter
a method for measuring the apparent fineness of yarn taken from fabrics from which Is 3 Chapter
non-fibrous materials are not removed,
It defines a method for measuring the apparent fineness of a yarn taken out of a fabric after removing non-fiber materials. This method
Note that the apparent fineness of the obtained yarn may not be the same as the apparent fineness of the original yarn used for the fabric.
Good.
Chapter 1 General
H.1 Scope of application
This annex specifies a method for measuring the apparent fineness of yarn removed from fabric. Usually suitable for yarns of uniform fineness
Can be used. This Annex specifies the method of unraveling yarn from the dough, and the number of yarns whose straightness is measured.
And the method of measuring the mass of all yarns.
H.2 Reference standards

). supplements).
ISO 1833-1 , Textiles-Quantitative chemical analysis-Part 1: General principles of testing
ISO / TR 6741-4 , Textiles−Fibres and yarns−Determination of commercial mass of consignments−Part 4:
Values used for the commercial allowances and the commercial moisture regains1)
ISO 7211-3 , Textiles-Woven fabrics-Construction-Methods of analysis-Part 3: Determination of crimp of
yarn in fabric
note Currently in the technical report draft stage.
1)
H.3 principle
Loosen the thread from a rectangular piece of woven fabric and measure the straightened length of the loosened thread. Mass is for testing
Water balance at standard condition (Method) Or
A to absolutely dry ISO
mass6741-4 With the commercial tolerance shown in
112
L 1096： 2010
( Method). B
The apparent fineness is calculated from the sum of the lengths stretched straight and the mass.
Method
If volatile substances other than water are likely to decrease considerably when heated IsAused. of 105 ° C,
to a temperature
Is the measurement performed without removing Chapter
non-fibrous
) Or
2 after
materials
removing
Chapter ( non-fibrous material ( Chapter) . 3 Chapter
H.4 apparatus
H.4.1 Balance Accuracy of 0.1% of minimum unit to be weighed.
H.4.2 Yarn straightening length measuring device
[ Annex G ( ISO 7211-3 Device specified in)]
H.4.3 Hot air dryer (method B )
H.5 Standard condition for adjustment and test

ISO 139 testing
standard
H.6 Test pieces

Include 5 or more weft package yarns, preferably large enough to provide the required yarn sample.
The fabric is exposed to the test standard for at least 24 hours.
To measure the apparent fineness of a warp yarn, two or more pieces of rectangular fabric containing different warp yarns are mixed with the adjus
Cut out. To measure the apparent fineness of the weft yarn, include yarn representatively taken from different weft yarn packages.
Cut out five or more pieces of rectangular fabric.
Annex G ( ISO 7211-3 Required from this piece of dough as specified in)
The yarn to be collected is collected. During these operations the warp is separated from the weft. However, all the pieces of dough
It is about 50 cm long and should be as long as possible. The width of the piece of fabric for both warp and weft yarns is
Ensure that it contains at least 50 warp or weft yarns.
Chapter 2 Measurement of Apparent Fineness of Yarns Removed from Fabrics without Removal of Non-Fiber Materials
H.7 operation
H.7.1 Yarn separation and length measurement
Annex G ( ISO 7211-3 As described in), loosen the first 10 threads from each piece of dough and stretch straight
Measure the length. Next, loosen at least 40 threads from each piece of dough.
H.7.2 Method A- adjusted to moisture equilibrium under standard conditions
ISO 139 Pre-adjust the yarn sample for 4 hours in the pre-adjustment standard condition specified in. After preliminary adjustment, test the yarn s
Weigh for 24 hours or at least 30 minutes in continuous exposure to standard conditions.
The yarn sample is exposed to water until the difference between the front and rear masses is within 0.1% of the latter mass and the yarn sample is eq
All warp yarns are weighed together, and weft yarns are weighed separately in sets of 50.
H.7.3 Method B- Absolute dry mass plus commercial tolerance
Hot air dryer ( H.4.3 20 minutes (when weighing the yarn sample in the dryer) or 40 minutes
(If the yarn sample is weighed outside the dryer), weigh the sample and make sure that the difference in mass before and after that is within 0.1% of t
Dry until the yarn sample has a constant weight. All warp yarns are weighed together and weft yarns are 50
Weigh each set of books.
113
L 1096： 2010
Chapter 3 Measurement of Apparent Fineness of Yarn Removed from Fabric After Removing Non-Fiber Material
H.8 operation
H.8.1 Yarn separation and length measurement
Annex G ( ISO 7211-3 As described in), loosen the first 10 threads from each piece of dough and stretch straight
Measure the length. Next, loosen at least 40 threads from each piece of dough. When non-fibrous materials are preventing the yarn from separating
Need to be removed first. Note that this can affect the length of the yarn. Minute thread
If the non-fibrous material has been removed prior to release, test for at least 6 h before measuring the straightened length.
Leave the removed dough in the standard condition.
H.8.2 Removal of non-fibrous materials
ISO 1833-1 The non-fibrous material is removed using the procedure described in
After removing non-fibrous material fromChapter
the yarn 2 Chapter
Indicated
sample, A Law
by ( H.7.2 See) B Law
( H.7.3 Operation)
by.
, Display of results and test report

Chapter 4 Calculation
H.9 Calculation and display of results
Using the following formula, convert the total length and total mass of each of the warp and weft to the apparent fineness
(Tex) is calculated.
H.9.1 Method A
The apparent fineness of the yarn is calculated by the following equation.
Ws
Ls = × 1 000
L×n
here, Ls: Apparent fineness (tex) of yarn adjusted in standard condition
W s： Mass of thread taken out from fabric (g)
L : Average length of straight stretch (m)
n : Number of weighed yarns
H.9.2 B method
The fineness of the yarn is calculated by the following equation.
Wd
Ld = × 1 000
L ×n
here, Ld: Yarn fineness (tex)
Wd: Absolute dry mass of thread taken out of fabric (g)
L : Average length of straight stretch (m)
n : Number of weighed yarns
L d × (100 + K )
Lc =
100
here, Lc : Fineness obtained by adding commercial tolerance to absolute dry mass (tex)
Ld: Yarn fineness (tex)
K : ISO 6741-4 Commercial tolerance shown
H.10 Test report

114
L 1096： 2010

c) The method actually used, ie, A Law Or B LawAny of
Also, one of the following
1) Not removing non-fibrous materials Chapter
( ) 2 Chapter
2) After removing non-fibrous materials (Chapter) 3 Chapter
d) Method used to remove non-fibrous materials
e) Apparent fineness of warp yarn
f) Apparent fineness of weft yarn
115
L 1096： 2010
Annex I
(Regulation)
Textile Products-Textiles-Structure-Analytical Methods-
Measurement of yarn twist taken out of dough
Methods of analysis-Part 4: Change technical content based on Determination of twist in yarn removed from fabric
It was created without.
The measurement of the twist of the yarn extracted from the yarn package ( ISO 2061 See)
The measurement is carried out using the same device as the one used, but the method is slightly different. In particular, it does not change during the
You have to be careful. Eliminates shrinkage present in most yarns from the weave of the fabric
To do this, it is necessary to apply standard tension.
As the yarn is organized into and unwound from a more complex fabric, more changes occur.
It is said. In order to measure the twist of a single yarn from a sample of the yarn, it is necessary to untwist the yarn.
Therefore, the single yarn is twisted again. The results of such a single strand twist test are based on
Shows the state before the combination, and does not mean the case where the yarn acts as a constituent yarn of the pliable yarn.
I.1 Scope of application

This annex provides a method for measuring the twist of yarn from textile fabrics. This method is for normal users
Applicable only to yarn spun by the formula. However, it cannot be applied to open-end spun yarn or interlaced yarn.
No.
I.2 Reference standards

). supplements).
ISO 2 , Textiles-Designation of the direction of twist in yarns and related products
ISO 2061 , Textiles-Determination of twist in yarns-Direct counting method
ISO 7211-3 , Textiles-Woven fabrics-Construction-Methods of analysis-Part 3: Determination of crimp of
yarn in fabric
I.3 principle
Take out a certain length of yarn from With
the dough,
the initial load applied, the user grips with two grippers located at a known distance.
Then rotate one of the grippers until all strands are removed from the length of thread.
I.4 apparatus
I.4.1 Detector
It consists of a pair of grips, one of which is connected to a tachometer and can rotate left or right. The gripsTable
are I.1
It shall be possible to adjust the length of the yarn specified in to allow testing. Certain pliable thread, cave
116
L 1096： 2010
The length of the thread sample may change during unraveling of thread and similar threads.
Annexinitial
What can be replaced is convenient. Before tightening the gripper, set an appropriate G ( ISO
load7211-3
[ ) See]
Be prepared to be added.
I.4.2 Disassembly needle
For
I.4.3 Magnifying magnifying and viewing the yarn sample under test.
glass
I.5 Standard condition for adjustment and test

ISO 139 testing
standard
I.6 Test pieces

One or several fabrics from which the yarn sample is to be removed shall be exposed to the test standard for at least 16 h. Extract for testing
Take out one thread from each piece of dough that contains more than 7
Cut off long.
Warp yarns in textile fabrics shall come from a number of different warp packages and have already been taken for testing.
Will be. A warp-direction piece of fabric with sufficient width to prepare the required number of yarn samples for testing 1
Collect a sheet ( Table reference)
I.1 . Since the weft from each weft package occupies a certain length of fabric, the sample
Shall be taken from different parts of the weft, and the width direction shall be sufficient to prepare the required number of yarn samples.
Collect 5 pieces of dough ( Table reference)
I.1 .
If more than one piece of dough is used, sample the same number of test pieces between the dough pieces.
The length of the Table
test piece
Shown
I.1 in Unless otherwise specified, the number of test pieces Table More
I.1 than the number shown
And This is the minimum value required to obtain an average with theoretical accuracy. The spirit for a particular purpose
The minimum number of tests to reach a degree is statistically determined.
Table −I.1Test length and number of tests

Thread type Minimum numberTest
of tests
length cm
Threads and cables 20 20
Continuous filament yarn (single yarn) 20 20
a) , b)
Spun yarn (single yarn) 50 2.5
note Dry spun yarn (single yarn) from long vein fiber
a)
When test is a test number in the test length 20 cm and 20 times

may be.
b)
For some cotton yarns, the minimum test length is 1.0 cm
You may need to.
I.7 operation
I.7.1 More direction
Pull out one thread and grasp it at the short end (about 10 cm) of the thread and make it vertical. Vertical thread fragments
Find out. The inclination of the basic form of the yarn (fiber, filament or twine) is S Or Z any
Observe if it matches the slope of the middle part of the character. The direction is O
Sr Write in Z ( ISO 2
reference)
.
I.7.2 More number
117
L 1096： 2010
Grasp one end of the yarn closest to the edge of the dough piece, pull it out in the horizontal direction, and setI.4.1
it at the zero point.
Refer to). This operation is performed before unraveling the end of the thread. Next, the other of the same thread
Grab the end of the thread, pull out the rest of the thread from the fabric in the weft direction, apply an appropriate initial load, and then loosen the en
Attach to the fixed side grip before. The initial load used is Annex G ( ISO 7211-3 )by.
In this operation, the yarn shall be moved so that no knitting occurs from the fabric to the dust detector.
The thread between the gaps shall not be touched during installation.
Rotate the rotating grip to release the twist. Disassembly needle I.4.2
( See also), fibrous or other forms
Move between objects and check for more unraveling. Note the number of rotations of the rotating side grip required for
Record. If the number of strands is less than five, record the individual test results in 0.1 units. Places between 5 and 15 times
In this case, the value shall be recorded in units of 0.5. Take more yarn from the dough pieces
And repeat this operation. At this time, to make it easier to pull out the yarn for the test,
Cut off the edge.
When measuring the twists of the yarns constituting the pliable yarn, firstly, the constituent yarns are separated by using a screen detector. Constitu
And hold the end of each thread removed so that the strands do not change. Inspection device for yarn separately
And measure the number as above.
I.8 Calculation and display of results

The number of twists per meter for each yarn sample is calculated by the following formula:
Tr
Ta = × 100
L
here, Ta : Twist (number / m)
Tr : Number (number of times) between test lengths
L : Test length (cm)
The average value of each of the warp and weft is calculated.
I.9 Test report
c) Yarn and twist direction of each component yarn (S or Z)
d) Test length used
e) More test results (number / m)
f) Average value of each test result (number of times / m)
118
L 1096： 2010
Annex J
(Regulation)
Textile products-Tensile properties of dough-
Measurement of tensile strength and elongation-strip method
This annex was issued as the first edition in 1999 ISO 13934-1 , Textiles-Tensile properties of fabrics-Part
1: Technical content based on Determination of maximum force and elongation at maximum force using the strip method
Was created without changing.
J.1 Scope of application

This annex specifies the procedure for measuring the maximum tension and elongation at maximum tension of dough by the strip method.
I do. This test method applies mainly to textiles. Applicable to fabrics made by other techniques, but usually elastic
Woven fabrics, geotextiles, non-woven fabrics, coated fabrics, glass fiber fabrics and carbon fibers or polyolefins
Not applicable to fabrics made with tape yarn ( Annex J3 reference)
.
This method determines the maximum tension and the maximum tension of a specimen that has reached equilibrium in the standard atmosphere of
Specifies the method for measuring elongation at time.
The tensile tester used in this method is limited to a constant-speed extensional tensile tester (CRE).
Note ISO 13934 Part 2 of this standard specifies the test method by the grab method. For reference standards
Annex J3 To
reference.
J.2 Reference standards

) Is recommended.
supplements).
ISO 139 : 1973, Textiles – Standard atmospheres for conditioning and testing ( EN 20139 )
ISO 3696 , Water for analytical laboratory use-Specification and test methods
ISO 10012 : 2003, Measurement management systems − Requirements for measurement processes and
measuring equipment
EN 10002-2 , Metallic materials−Tensile testing−Part 2: Verification of the force measuring system of the
tensile testing machines
J.3 Terms and definitions
J.3.1
Constant speed extension type tensile tester ( CRE )
A tensile tester that has a fixed grip and a constant-speed movable grip and has a structure that does not substantially cause deflection as a whole.
J.3.2
Strip test
A tensile test performed by firmly gripping the entire width of the test piece with the gripper of the testing machine.
119
L 1096： 2010
J.3.3
Gauge length
The distance between two effective grip points on the test rig.
Note The effective grip point (or line) of the gripper grips the specimen with the carbon paper under the prescribed initial tension.
This can be confirmed by a grip pattern generated on the surface of the test piece and / or the grip opening.
J.3.4
Initial length
At the beginning of the test, the length of the test specimen between the two effective gripJ.3.3
points
reference)
under
. a given initial tension (
J.3.5
Initial tension
The force applied to the specimen at the start of the test.
Note Use the initial tension to measure the initial length of the specimen
J.3.4 as( well as reference)
J.3.7 .
J.3.6
Growth
Specimen elongation caused by the application of tension. Display in length units.
J.3.7
Growth rate
Ratio of test piece elongation to initial length. Display as a percentage.
J.3.8
Elongation at maximum tension
Specimen elongation that occurs when maximum tensionFigure J.1 ( .
is applied
reference)
1 tension 5 Elongation at maximum tension

2 Maximum tension 6 Elongation at cutting
3 Tension at cutting 7 Growth
4 Initial tension
Figure− J.1
Tension-elongation curve
120
L 1096： 2010
J.3.9
Elongation when cutting
Elongation of the test piece corresponding toFigure
the tension
reference).
J.1 at the time of cutting (
J.3.10
Cutting tension
Figure
The tension recorded when the specimen was cut in the tensile J.1
testreference).
(
J.3.11
Maximum tension
The maximum tension recorded when the specimen was pulled to cut under the given conditions
Figure reference).
(
J.1
J.4 principle
Elongate a test piece of specified dimensions at a constant speed until cutting, measure and record the maximum tension and the elongation at the m
You. If necessary, record the tension at cutting and elongation at cutting.
J.5 sampling
Specimens shall be selected by procedures specified in the material specifications for the dough or by consultation between the delivery and delive
If there is no specification, Annex J1 Use the recommended sampling procedure described in.
J.6 apparatus
J.6.1 CRE tensile tester
The measurement confirmation systemISO
of the : 2003.
tensile
10012 Constant speed extension type tensile tester (CRE)
tester
Is J.6.1.1 ~ J.6.1.6 Have the general characteristics described in (1).
J.6.1.1 The tensile tester is designed to measure both the tension applied when the specimen is pulled to cut and the elongation of the specimen.
Is provided. Under operating conditions, the accuracy of the device is EN 10002-2 Grade 1 Use of testing machine
Within the range of use, the error in the indicated or recorded maximum tension at any point shall not exceed ± 1% and shall not exceed 1%.
The error in the indication or recorded value of the distance between the fixtures shall not exceed ± 1 mm.
J.6.1.2 EN 10002-2 If a second class tester is used, this fact shall be stated in the test report.
J.6.1.3 If the recording of tension and elongation is performed by the data acquisition board and software,
The frequency of capture should be at least 8 times per second.
J.6.1.4 The testing machine is capable of constant-speed extension at 20 mm / min and 100 mm / min with an accuracy of ± 10%.
J.6.1.5 The tester shall be capable of setting the gauge length to 100 mm and 200 mm within ± 1 mm.
J.6.1.6 In the gripping device of the testing machine, the center of the two gripping ports is on the line of action of tension, and both ends are in the d
At right angles to each other, and the gripping surfaces are placed on the same plane.
The gripper shall be able to grip the specimen without slipping, and shall not cause the specimen to cut or lose its strength.
Structure.
The grip surface of the gripper shall be smooth and flat. Cannot hold test specimen satisfactorily even with packing
In such cases, a notch or a wavy mouth may be used to prevent slippage.
Regardless of whether a smooth or corrugated grip is used, it should be used as an auxiliary material to improve the grip of the specimen.
Paper, leather, plastics or rubber can be used. For a smooth grip, cut or grab at the grip
If slip cannot be prevented, capstan grips are often good. Elongation is tested
121
L 1096： 2010
The movement of two reference points on one side can be measured by following (tracking) with an extensometer. The width of the grip mouth is
It should not be narrower than the width of the test piece and should be at least 60 mm wide.
J.6.2 Equipment for cutting test pieces and loosening them to a specified width
J.6.3 Specimen immersion device for wet test
J.6.4 For wetting the specimen ISO 3696 Class 3 water in accordance with
J.6.5 Nonionic wetting agent
J.7 Temperature
・Standard
and humidity
conditions
control for conditioning and testing
The standard conditions for temperature control, humidity control,
ISOconditioning
139 ( EN 20139
and testing
). Maare as follows:
In the case of a test in a wet state, temperature control, humidity control, and conditioning are not required.
Note Specimens should be conditioned and conditioned for at least 24 hours without tension.
J.8 operation
J.8.1 General
Cut two sets of test pieces from each laboratory sample in the warp direction and the other set in the weft direction.
You.
Each set consists of at least five test specimens. If higher accuracy is required, test
Test with more pieces.
J.5 as well as J2 Specimens shall be cut from the test sample within 150 mm from both ends in accordance with
Annex
No. Cut the test pieces in the warp direction so that each test piece does not contain the same warp yarn.
The test specimens for each direction are cut so that each does not contain the same weft yarn.
J.8.2 Size
The width of each test piece shall be 50 mm ± 0.5 mm (excluding edges) and the length shall be 200 mm.
Length that can be secured. However, based on previous experience, it is expected that elongation under maximum tension will exceed 75%.
For doughs to be cut, the gripping length may be reduced to 100 mm. 50 mm if negotiated between delivery and delivery parties
The test may be performed with a test piece having a width other than the above. In this case, the width of the test piece shall be specified in the repor
J.8.3 Preparation of test pieces
In the case of woven fabric, the test piece shall have its long side parallel to the warp or weft of the fabric. Also necessary
Cut to a width that can secure a sufficient edge. Approximately the same number of threads from each edge of the long side of the cut piece
Take J.8.2 Make the width of the test piece specified in. The width of the rim shall be such that the length of the yarn during the test is at each rim
The width shall not fall off.
Note In the case of ordinary woven fabrics, it is sufficient to have 15 rims of about 5 mm. For dense fabrics,
The rim may be narrower. For very coarse fabrics, the edge should be 10 mm.
it can.
For fabrics with only a few threads per cm, loosen the threads to a certain widthJ.8.2
( As much as possible
You.
If the number of yarns in the width direction is counted and the number of yarns is 20 or more, adjust the remaining yarns of the same set to the sam
If the number is less than 20, adjust the width of the test piece so that the number of threads is at least 20. Specimen width is 50
If it is not mm ± 0.5 mm, the width and number of yarns shall be stated in the test report. You can loosen the thread and pull it out
If the fabric does not fit, cut the specimen parallel to the warp or weft, along a line 50 mm apart. Some weave
122
L 1096： 2010
With a material, the thread direction cannot be confirmed without tearing the cloth, but by tearing the test piece,
It is better not to.
J.8.4 Test piece for wet test
J.8.4.1 If the maximum tension in the wet state is required in addition to the maximum tension in the dry state, have the appropriate width and dry sta
Cut a section that is at least twice as long as required for Annex J2 reference)
. At both ends of each section
Unwrap the number (if it can be loosened), then cut in the horizontal direction and bisect it. One is dry
The other is used for measuring the large tension and the other for measuring the maximum tension in the wet state. By doing so, they are paired
The test specimen will contain the same yarn in the longitudinal direction.
For fabrics that shrink abnormally when wet empirically, The length of the test piece for measuring the maximum tension in the wet state is
It must be longer than the length of the specimen for measuring the maximum tension in the dry state.
J.8.4.2 Specimens were used for testing in wet conditions.
ISO 3696 1 hour at 20 ° C ± 2 ° C in 3rd grade water in accordance with
Let it soak. An aqueous solution containing no more than 1 g of nonionic wetting agent per liter may be used instead of water.
Note For tropical areas, ISO 139 Apply the temperature specified in.
J.9 operation
J.9.1 Gauge length (grab length)
For fabrics with an elongation at maximum tension of up to 75%, the gauge length of the tensile tester shall be 200 mm ± 1 mm and the maximum
For fabrics with elongation of more than 75%, set to 100 mm ± 1 mm ( J.8.2 as well as reference)
J.9.2 .
J.9.2 Elongation speed and elongation speed
Elongation speed of tensile tester or elongation speed as a function of elongation
TableatSet
maximum
J.1 as specified
tension
in.
Table −J.1
Elongation or elongation speed
Gauge length Elongation at maximum tension
Elongation speed
Extension speed
mm % % / Min mm / min
200 <8 Ten 20
200 ≧ 8〜 ≦ 75 50 100
100 > 75 100 100
J.9.3 Attaching the test piece

The test piece shall be mounted with initial tension applied or with a tension close to zero (relaxed) and relaxed. Hatsari
When mounting with force, ensure that no more than 2% elongation has occurred. Limit growth to less than 2%
If it is not possible to do so, do not apply it with initial tension.
J.9.3.1 Wearing in a relaxed state
Attach the test piece in a relaxed state. In this case, hang it while mounting the test piece and after closing the gripper.
Initial tension J.9.3.2
is It shall be kept below the initial tension shown in and shall not exceed 2% elongation. The elongation of the test piece is
J.9.3.2 Is measured from the point on the tension-elongation curve corresponding to the initial tension shown in (1). The elongation to reach the initi
Add to the gauge length. In this way, the initial length necessary to calculate the elongation at the maximum tension is determined.
If an electronic measuring instrument is used to record elongation, the exact initial length must be used in elongation calculations.
And confirm.
J.9.3.2 Installation with initial tension applied
The following, corresponding to the mass pera)unit
, b)area,
Or c) Apply the initial tension specified in.
one two Three

L 1096： 2010
Mass per unit area Initial tension

Two
a) ≤ 200 g / m 2N
Two Two
b) > 200 g / m ~ ≤ 500 g / m Five N
Two
c) > 500 g / m 10 N
J.9.4 operation
Grasp the test piece in the middle so that the center line in the vertical direction of the test piece passes through the middle point in front of the grip
Activate the device that records the elongation at high tension. Activate the movable jaws and extend the specimen to the breaking point.
a) Record the maximum tension and, if necessary, the breaking tension in Newtons.
b) Record the elongation at maximum tension and, if necessary, the break in millimeters or the percentage elongation.
Elongation and elongation are recorded at least in the next closest unit.
0.4 mm or 0.2% when elongation is <8%
1 mm or 0.5% when the elongation is ≥ 8% to ≤ 75%
2 mm or 1% when elongation is> 75%
Test at least five test specimens in each of the dough length and weft directions.
J.9.4.1 Pussy
If the specimen slips and protrudes more than 2 mm from the imbalance or the grip line, the test result is excluded.
J.9.4.2 Grasping mouth break
The break that occurs within 5 mm of the grip line of the gripper is recorded as the gripper break. 5 tests
At the end of the test, the test results are examined, and the results recorded as grip ruptures are lower than the lowest values of normal rupture results
If it is too high, the test results for gripper rupture may be included. The result of the gripper break is lower than the lowest value of normal break
If low, exclude the results of the gripping rupture and continue the test until five normal ruptures are obtained. all
If the test result of the above is a gripper break or five normal breaks cannot be obtained, change the individual test results.
Report without coefficients or confidence limits. The result of the gripper break shall be indicated in the report and
Discuss the results.
J.9.5 Testing on wet specimens
Immersion liquid
J.8.4.2( Immediately after removing the test piece from blotting paper with blotter paper J.9.1 ~
J.9.4 Perform the test according to the requirements of In the wet test,
J.9.3.2 Apply half (1/2) of the initial tension specified in.
J.10 Calculation and display of results

For each of the vertical and horizontal directions,
The arithmetic mean of the maximum tension and the tension at break is calculated in Newtons.
Round the result as follows:
Tension <100 N 1 Up to N units
≧ 100 N 〜 <100 N 10 Up to N units

≥100 N for 100 Up to N units
The arithmetic mean of the elongation at maximum tension and, if necessary, the elongation at break in each of the vertical and horizontal direction
And round the result as follows:
0.2 when elongation is <8% %unit
≥ 8% to <75% 0.5 %unit
> 75% 1 %unit
If necessary, calculate the coefficient of variation to the nearest 0.1%, calculate the 95% confidence limit for the measurement, and average it.
124
L 1096： 2010
Rounds a number to the same precision as the value.
J.11 Test report

b) Confirmation of test sample and sampling procedure if necessary
c) Gauge length in millimeters
d) Elongation in percent / minute or elongation rate in millimeters / minute
e) Initial tension in Newton units or procedure with looseness
f) The condition of the test piece (whether the temperature and humidity are adjusted or wet)
g) Total number of trials, including excluded trials, and reasons for excluded trials
h) If the width is not 50 mm ± 0.5 mm, the width and number of threads
i) Deviation from prescribed operation
j) The arithmetic mean of the maximum tension in Newtons and the tension at break if necessary
k) Arithmetic average of elongation at maximum tension in percent and, if necessary, elongation at break
l) Coefficient of variation expressed as a percentage of the tension and elongation, if necessary
m) Where applicable, the tension, the 95% confidence limit of the tension in Newtons, and the percentage expressed as a percentage.
95% confidence limit of the elongation
125
L 1096： 2010
Annex J1
(reference)
Recommended sampling procedure
J1.1 Consignment samples (number of pieces taken from cargo or lot)

From cargo or lot, A predetermined number of cloths described in (1) are randomly collected. Damaged or not (wet) during transport
Table J1.1
Do not include fabric with traces.
Table J1.1
− Consignment sample
Number of pieces in cargo or lot Minimum number of pieces in the cargo sample
3 or less 1
4-10 2
11-30 3
31-75 4
76 or more 5
J1.2 Number of test samples

Cut a test sample with a full width of at least 1 m from each piece of the cargo sample.
From the place you choose
.
Wrinkles or visually flawed areas should not be included in the test sample.
126
L 1096： 2010
Annex J2
(reference)
The place to cut the test piece from the test sample
1 Fabric width
2 Fabric length
3 edge
4 Additional part for wet test (if necessary)
d = 150 mm
Figure −J2.1
127
L 1096： 2010
Annex J3
(Reference)
References
ISO 13934-2 , Textiles-Tensile properties of fabrics-Part 2: Determination of maximum force using the grab
method
ISO 13935-1 , Textiles-Seam tensile properties of fabrics and made-up textile articles-Part 1: Determination of
maximum force to seam rupture using the strip method
maximum force to seam rupture using the grab method
ISO 1421 , Rubber- or plastics-coated fabrics-Determination of tensile strength and elongation at break
ISO 4606 , Textile glass−Woven fabric−Determination of tensile breaking force and elongation at break by the
strip method
ISO 9073-3 , Textiles-Test methods for nonwovens-Part 3: Determination of tensile strength and elongation
ISO 10319 , Geosynthetics-Wide-width tensile test
128
L 1096： 2010
Annex K
(Regulation)
Textile products-Tensile properties of dough-
Measurement of tensile strength by grab method
This annex was issued as the first edition in 1999 ISO 13934-2 , Textiles-Tensile properties of fabrics-Part
2: Created based on the Determination of maximum force using the grab method without changing the technical content
It is.
K.1 Scope of application

This annex specifies the grab method for measuring the tensile strength (maximum tension) of fabrics. This test
The law applies mainly to textiles. Although it can be applied to fabrics made by other techniques, it is usually
Made of style, non-woven fabric, coated fabric, glass fiber fabric and carbon fiber or polyolefin tape yarn
Cannot be applied to Annex KD reference)
.
This method specifies a method for measuring the maximum tension of a test piece that has reached equilibrium in a standard atmosphere and a we
Set. The tensile tester used in this method is limited to a constant-speed extensional tensile tester (CRE).
Note ISO 13934 Part 1 of the standard specifies the strip method. For references Annex KD
See
K.2 Reference standards

) Is recommended.
supplements).
ISO 139 : 1973, Textiles-Standard atmospheres for conditioning and testing ( EN 20139 )
measuring equipment
EN 10002-2 , Metallic materials–Tensile testing−Part 2: Verification of the force measuring system of the
tensile testing machines
K.3 Terms and definitions

K.3.1
Constant speed extension type tensile tester ( CRE )
Tensile tester equipped with a fixed gripper and a constant-speed movable gripper and having a structure that ISO
does not cause substantial deflection
13934-1 reference)
.
K.3.2
Grab test
A tensile test in which only the central part of the test piece is gripped by the gripper of the gripper.
129
L 1096： 2010
K.3.3
Maximum tension
The maximum tension recorded when the specimen is pulled to break under certain conditions (
ISO 13934-1 reference)
.
K.3.4
Gauge length
The distance between two effective grip points on the test rig.
Note The effective grip point (or line) of the gripper grips the specimen with the carbon paper under the prescribed initial tension.
This can be confirmed by the pattern attached to the surface of the test piece and / or the gripper.
K.4 principle
Grasp the center of the test piece with the specified size gripper, extend at a constant speed until it breaks, and record the maximum tension.
K.5 sampling
The test sample is selected by the procedure specified in the material specifications of the dough or by consultation between the delivery and delive
If there is no material specification,Annex KA The example of the recommended sampling procedure shown in Table 1 can be used.
Annex
Specific examples suitable for cutting test specimens from test samples in aKB
laboratory
Shown in Bends, wrinkles,
Specimens with ears at both ends and parts not representing the dough are excluded.
K.6 apparatus
K.6.1 CRE tensile tester
The measurement confirmation systemISO
of the : 2003.
tensile
10012 The constant speed extension type tensile tester (CRE)
tester K.6.1.1
~ K.6.1.6 Has the specified general characteristics.
K.6.1.1 Tensile testing machines shall not be equipped with a device to indicate or record the tension applied to the specimen until elongation breaks
I have to. The accuracy of the device depends on the operating conditions.
EN 10002-2 Grade 1 Maximum within the operating range of the testing machine
The error in the indication or recorded value of the tension shall not exceed ± 1%.
K.6.1.2 EN 10002-2 If a second-class tester as specified in is used, this shall be stated in the test report.
K.6.1.3 If the tension is recorded by the data acquisition board and software,
The degree shall be at least 8 times per second.
K.6.1.4 The test machine is capable of constant speed extension of 50 mm / min with an accuracy of ± 10%.
K.6.1.5 The tester can be set to a gauge length of 100 mm within ± 1 mm or 75 mm if agreed by the parties.
What can be done.
K.6.1.6 The gripping device of the testing machine is designed so that the center point of the gripper is in the middle of the tension direction, and bot
Also, the gripping surfaces are mounted so as to be on the same plane. Hold the test piece so that the test piece does not slip.
And shall be constructed in such a way that the specimen does not cut or lose strength. Grab mouth
The gripping surface is smooth and flat. If the test piece cannot be gripped satisfactorily even with packing
If not, a notched or corrugated grip may be used to prevent slippage. Smooth or wavy pattern
Even when using a misalignment grip, paper, leather, plastic, etc. may be
Box or rubber can be used. In the grab method, the area of the surface holding the dough is 25 mm ± 1 mm x 25 mm
± 1 mm.
Annex KC As explained in a) Or b) This area can be obtained by any one of the following methods.
130
L 1096： 2010
a) Hold one grip (25 mm x minimum 40 mm, preferably 50 mm) horizontally with the long side perpendicular to the direction of extension
Place it. Hold the other grip of the same size with the previous grip so that the long side is parallel to the extension direction.
Install in the vertical orientation [
Figure ] . a)
KC.1
b) Hold one grip (25 mm x minimum 40 mm, preferably 50 mm) horizontally with the long side perpendicular to the extension direction.
Place it. Attach the other grip (25 mm x 25 mm) [ ] . b)
Figure KC.1
K.6.2 Device for cutting test pieces
K.6.3 Specimen immersion device for wet test
K.6.4 For wetting the specimen ISO 3696 Class 3 water in accordance with
K.6.5 Nonionic wetting agent
K.7 Temperature
・and
Standard
humidity
conditions
The standard conditions for temperature control, humidity control,
ISOconditioning
139 ( EN 20139
and testing
). Wetare as follows:
If the test is performed in a wet state, it is not necessary to control the humidity and condition.
Note Specimens should be conditioned and conditioned for at least 24 hours without tension.
K.8 Preparation of test specimen

K.8.1 General
Cut two sets of test pieces from the test sample. Cut one set from the warp direction and the other set from the weft direction. It
Each set consists of at least five test specimens. If higher accuracy is required, more test pieces
Shall be tested.
Annex
K.5 as well as KB The test piece shall not be cut from any part of the laboratory sample within 150 mm at both ends in accordance with
Shall be. Cut the test pieces in the warp direction so that each test piece does not contain the same warp,
The test piece in the thread direction is cut so that each test piece does not contain the same weft thread.
K.8.2 Size
The width of the test piece shall be 100 mm ± 2 mm, and the length shall be sufficient to secure a grip gauge length of 100 mm.
K.8.3 Preparation of test pieces
On each test piece, extend the entire length of the test piece, parallel to the warp or weft, at a distance of 38 mm from one end.
A straight line.
K.8.4 Test piece for wet test
K.8.4.1 If the maximum wet tension is required in addition to the maximum dry tension, the required width for the dry test shall be sufficient.
Cut a test piece at least twice as long as Annex KB reference)
. Number each end of each section,
And cut it into two parts. One is used for measurement in a dry state, and the other is used for measurement in a wet state. like this
As a result, each set of test pieces contains the same yarn in the length direction. Experience
For fabrics that undergo very large shrinkage when wet, the length of the test piece for maximum tension measurement when wet should be dry.
It must be longer than the test specimen for measuring the maximum tension during drying.
K.8.4.2 Wetting test
For wet testing, place test specimens ISO 3696 Immersion for 1 hour at a temperature of 20 ° C ± 2 ° C in grade 3 water according to
To An aqueous solution containing no more than 1 g of nonionic wetting agent per liter may be used instead of water.
Note For tropical areas, ISO 139 May be applied.
131
L 1096： 2010
K.9 operation
K.9.1 Gauge length
Increase the gauge length of the tensile tester to 100 mmIfwithin
agreed± between
1 mm. the delivery and delivery parties, it shall be set to 75 mm.
K.9.2 Tensile speed
Set the tensile speed of the tensile tester to 50 mm / min.
K.9.3 Attaching the test piece
The center line in the longitudinal direction of the test piece should pass through the midpoint of the front end of the gripper port and be perpendicu
Or, attach the test piece so that the straight line drawn on the test piece coincides with one end of the gripper. One at the top
Close the jaws, adjust the specimen along the indicator line of the lower jaw so that tension is not applied, and weigh the specimen by its own weight
Let it hang down and close the lower jaw.
K.9.4 operation
Activate the device that records the maximum tension. Activate the movable jaws and extend the specimen to the breaking point. new
Record the maximum tension in tons. Test at least 5 specimens in each of the vertical and horizontal directions
I do.
All breaks that occur within 5 mm of the grip line of the gripper are recorded as gripper breaks. Five
At the end of each test, the test results are examined. If there is a gripper fracture higher than the minimum value for normal fracture,
May include the result of the gripper break. If the result of the gripper rupture is lower than the minimum value of normal rupture,
The test is to be ruled out and the test is continued until 5 normal breaks have been obtained. All test results
Calculate the coefficient of variation or the confidence limit if the grab break occurs or if five normal breaks are not obtained.
Report individual test results. The results of the grip opening rupture shall be indicated in the report, and the results shall be
Will be negotiated between the delivery and delivery parties.
K.9.5 Testing on wet specimens
Immersion liquid
K.8.4.2( ), Remove excess water with blotter paper for a short time, and immediately K.9.1
~ K.9.4 Perform the test.
K.10 Calculation and display of results

Regarding the test results in the vertical and horizontal directions,
The arithmetic mean of the maximum tension is calculated in Newtons.
Round the number as follows:
<100 N 1 N unit
≧ 100 N 〜 <1 000 N 10 N units
≧ 1 000 N 100 N unit
If necessary, calculate the coefficient of variation to the nearest 0.1%, and round the 95% confidence limit to the same precision as the average.
You.
K.11 Test report

b) Confirmation of certification of test sample and sampling procedure if necessary
c) The condition of the test piece (whether the temperature and humidity have been adjusted or conditioned, or whether it is wet)
d) Number of specimens, including the number of excluded tests, and the reason for excluding them
132
L 1096： 2010
e) If the gauge length is not 100 mm, its length

f) Deviation from prescribed operation
g) Arithmetic mean of maximum tension expressed in Newton
h) The coefficient of variation of the average value, if necessary, as a percentage
i) If necessary, 95% confidence limits of the mean in Newtons
133
L 1096： 2010
Annex KA
(Regulation)
KA.1 Consignment samples (number of pieces taken from cargo or lot)

From cargo or lot, Randomly collect a predetermined number of fabrics specified in. Damaged or not (wet) during transport
Table KA.1
Table KA.1
3 or less 1
4-10 2
11-30 3
31-75 4
76 or more 5
KA.2 Number of test samples

Cut a test sample of at least 1 m in length from each piece of consignment material (at least 3 m away from the end of the piece)
Random from location).
Wrinkles or visually flawed parts shall not be included in the test sample.
134
L 1096： 2010
Annex KB
(reference)
1 Fabric width
2 Fabric length
3 edge
4 Additional part for wet test (if necessary)
d = 150 mm
− The place to cut the test piece from the test sample
Figure KB.1
135
L 1096： 2010
Annex KC
(reference)
Grab placement for grab test
Unit: mm
a)
b)
1 Back grip surface

2 Front gripping surface
3 Tension acting direction
Figure KC.1
− Grab placement for grab test
136
L 1096： 2010
Annex KD
(Reference)
References
ISO 13934-1 , Textiles-Tensile properties of fabrics-Part 1: Determination of maximum force and elongation at
maximum force using the strip method
maximum force to seam rupture using the strip method
maximum force to seam rupture using the grab method
ISO 1421 , Rubber-or plastics-coated fabrics-Determination of tensile strength and elongation at break
ISO 4606 , Textile glass−Woven fabric−Determination of tensile breaking force and elongation at break by the
strip method
ISO 9073-3 , Textiles-Test methods for nonwovens-Part 3: Determination of tensile strength and elongation
137
L 1096： 2010
Annex L
(Regulation)
Textile products-tear properties of fabrics-
Measurement of tear strength by the ballistic pendulum method (Elmendorf)
This annex was issued as the first edition in 2000 ISO 13937-1 , Textiles-Tear properties of fabrics-Part 1:
Do not change the technical content based on the Determination of tear force using ballistic pendulum method (Elmendorf).
It was created well.
L.1 Scope of application

This annex specifies the ballistic pendulum and pendulum (Elmendorf) method for measuring the tear strength of fabrics.
I do. In this method, a sharp force is applied to the cut of the test piece taken from the dough, and the cut is drawn to the specified length.
Measure the force required to crack. This measurement applies mainly to textile fabrics. However, for example, non-woven fabric
May be applicable to fabrics made by other techniques, such as knit fabrics and stretch fabrics.
Is not applicable. In addition, highly anisotropic fabrics and coarse meshes where rips may move from one direction to the other.
It cannot be applied to new fabrics.
Note 1 As a test using a tensile tester, ISO 13937-2 Has the Trousers method, ISO 13937-3 To
Is the ISO 13937-4 Specifies the tongue method.
Note 2 About pendulum method for coated cloth ISO 4674-2 See For trapezoid test method
In the case of non-woven fabric
ISO 9073-4 For coated cloth ISO 4674 See
L.2 Reference standards

Among the cited standards, those with the year AD are applied to the edition of the stated year, and subsequently revised
) editions (including supplem
Does not apply. Normative references without a year are the latest versions (including
). supplements).
ISO 1974 : 1990, Paper-Determination of tearing resistance (Elmendorf method)
measuring equipment
L.3 Terms and definitions

L.3.1
Tear strength
The force required to tear a fabric under given conditions.
Note The tear strength depends on whether the tearing occurs across the warp or the weft.
They are defined as warp tear strength and weft tear strength, respectively.
L.3.2
Tear length
138
L 1096： 2010
Measure the distance from the start to the end of the tear.
L.4 principle
By measuring the work required to tear the pre-cut dough to a predetermined distance,
Measure the tear strength. The device consists of a pendulum with a gripper, and the pendulum is tested with the maximum potential energy.
The gripper on the pendulum and the gripper fixed to the base when lifting to the starting position
Is configured. Fix the specimen to the two jaws and make a cut in the specimen between the two jaws.
And begin to tear by. Next, release the pendulum and move the movable jaw on the pendulum away from the fixed jaw on the table.
The specimen is completely torn as it moves. The tear strength at this time is measured.
L.5 sampling
The test sample is selected according to the procedure described in the material specification or the agreement between the delivery and delivery pa
Recommended sample of sampling procedure Annex LB It was shown to. Also, cut from the test sample.
An example of the type of testAnnex
piece to
LCbe Itremoved
was shown to. Bent and wrinkled parts, both ears of fabric and raw
Parts that do not represent the ground are not used as test samples.
L.6 apparatus
L.6.1 General
The measurement confirmation system ISO
of the pendulum
10012 Shall conform
testing machine
to For device calibration, ISO 1974
of Annex B According to the instructions.
L.6.2 Pendulum testing machine
The test piece
It isisheld between two of a movable gripper of the tester and a fixed gripper attached to the frame.
The movable gripper is attached to a pendulum that falls by gravity. Even if you do n’t touch the pendulum during the test
The pendulum automatically tears the specimen.
The device consists of the following parts:
L.6.2.1 Rigid structure
A support structure that supports a pendulum, fixed jaws and notches and a measuring device.
L.6.2.2 pendulum
Device for holding the pendulum lifted to the test start position (pending pendulum) and instantly releasing the pendulum
A pendulum that can swing freely around the horizontal axis on the bearing. Pendulum adds weight
Or, the mass can be changed by replacing the pendulum.
L.6.2.3 Mechanical or electronic measuring instrument
Measures the energy required to tear a specimen by measuring the maximum amplitude when the pendulum first swings
Mechanical or electronic measuring instrument for Tear strength can be read directly and there is a zero point setting means.
of.
L.6.2.4 Movable grip integrated with pendulum and fixed grip integrated with device structure
The two jaws are separated by 3 mm ± 0.5 mm to allow the knife to enter. The gripper is grasped
The test specimens are arranged in a row so as to form a plane parallel to the axis of the pendulum. With the center of the support axis of the pendulum
The line connecting the upper end of the gripper and the vertical line from the support shaft makes an angle of 27.5 ° ± 0.5 °, and
The distance from the top of the mouth is 104 mm ± 1 mm.
The dimensions of the gripping surface of the gripping opening are not critical; widths of 30 mm to 40 mm, depth and height are desirable.
139
L 1096： 2010
Although it is 20 mm or less, if it is 15 mm or less, it can be considered to be suitable. Pendulum lifted to starting position
When held, the gripping surfaces of the two jaws shall be on the same plane perpendicular to the plane of motion of the pendulum. Grab
The surface condition of the surface and the force applied
The testtopiece
the gripper
shall be able to be gripped without slipping.
L.6.2.5 Sharp knife
At the beginning of the tearing of the specimen, a sharp notch is used to make a 20 mm ± 0.5 mm notch between the two jaws.
If.
L.6.3 Tools for cutting test specimens
Figure IfL.1
possible, use a die-cut or formwork to cut test specimens of the dimensions shown in.
L.7 Temperature
・Standard
and humidity
conditions
Standard conditions for temperature control, humidity control,ISO
conditioning
139 According
and testing
to the provisions of
L.8 Preparation of test specimen

L.8.1 General
From the test sample, prepare two sets of test pieces, one set for the warp direction and the other set for the weft direction.
cut out. Warp the short side of the test piece to ensure that the tear propagates (seeds) within the notch area.
Align (align) properly parallel to the direction or weft direction.
For fabrics other than woven fabrics, for example, the directions designated as the length direction and the weft direction are used. A set of test pie
The test shall consist of at least 5 specimens and, if agreed, a larger number of specimens. L.5 as well as
Attached
No two warps or wefts shall be included in any two test pieces, and no two test pieces shall
Letter LC
It shall not be cut off from the part within 150 mm from the edge of the dough.
L.8.2 Shape and dimensions
The test piece is Cut
Figure L.1 into the shape shown in As long as the tear length is 43 mm ± 0.5 mm,
Differences in shape (e.g., rounded corners, auxiliary parts for gripper alignment) are allowed.
Unit: mm
1 slit
Figure −L.1
Specimen dimensions
140
L 1096： 2010
L.8.3 Cutting test pieces

Specimens of woven fabric shall be cut so that the short side is parallel to the warp or weft of the fabric
And For a test piece whose short side is parallel to the warp, the Across
tear is the weft Happens, the short side becomes the weft
For parallel specimens, tearing is assumed to occur across the warp ( L.3.1 as well as LC reference)
Annex .
L.9 operation
L.9.1 General
The pendulum (so that the measured value falls between 15% and 85% of the full scale of )the
L.6.2.2 Select
indicator)
the mass.
Make sure the device is set to zero and lift the pendulum to the starting position.
L.9.2 Attaching the test piece
Hold the specimen so that the long side of the specimen is parallel to the top of the L.6.2.4 ). test
Carefully insert the test piece in the center, with the lower end of the test piece aligned with the lower end of the opening.
L.6.2.5 ) knife(
Make a 20 mm ± 0.5 mm cut on the other side of the notch using. 43 mm ± 0.5 mm tear length remains
Will be.
L.9.3 motion
Pendulum stopL.6.2.2
( Press) to release the pendulum. Do not disturb the position of the pointer of the indicator
To stand still. The tear strength is read in Newtons on the minimum scale of the indicator or digital meter. Depending on the pointing device
In some cases, it is necessary to multiply the readout value by a factor determined by the device in order to obtain Newton units.
Sometimes (L.10 as well as reference)
LA.5 . Test results are actually within 15% to 85% of full scale
Make sure that Repeat the test for at least 5 specimens in each of the fabric warp and weft directions.
You.
Whether the yarn has been torn along the direction of the tearing force, the thread slips off the fabric, rather than being torn
Observe if it is not.
a) No slipping or falling off of yarn from the fabric
b) No slippage or slippage at the grip
c) Fifteen
When tearing is completed within the notch area of mm width
Judge that the test was performed correctly and discard other test results.
If the test results for three or more of the five specimens must be discarded, this test method shall be used.
Improper. If agreed upon by the parties concerned, double the number of additional test specimens and test specimens.
I do. In that case, the reporting of the results shall also be agreed.
L.10 Calculation and display of results

The pendulum measures energy directly. At present, tear resistance is directly expressed as Newton force
It is customary to do so. Convert the result displayed in other units to Newton ( LA.5 reference)
.
Calculate the arithmetic average of the tear strength in Newtons in the warp and weft directions and round to 2 significant figures.
Two significant figures with a coefficient of variation down to the nearest 0.1% and a 95% confidence limit in Newtons where necessary
Calculate up to If necessary, minimum tear strength and maximum tear strength for each of the warp and weft directions of the fabric.
Record the tear strength.
141
L 1096： 2010
L.11 Test report

L.11.1 general information
General information is as follows.
b) Confirmation of test sample identification and, if necessary, sampling procedure
c) Measurement range used
d) Number of specimens, number of excluded tests, and reasons
e) Observational record of abnormal tearing behavior.
f) Deviations and differences from the prescribed operation
L.11.2 Test results
The test report shall be as follows.
a) Average tear strength in warp and weft directions in Newtons.
If there are only three or four correctly torn specimens, individual specimens of properly torn specimens
Add the result.
b) If necessary, specify the coefficient of variation (%) of tear strength
c) If necessary, 95% confidence limit for tear strength in Newtons
d) If necessary, the maximum and minimum tear strength of each test specimen and fabric, expressed in Newtons
142
L 1096： 2010
Annex LA
(reference)
Test equipment adjustment and certification
If necessary, L.6 Adjust the functional components of the test equipment according to the manufacturer's instructions to meet the requirements o
The recommended inspection items before conducting the test are as follows.
LA.1
With the pendulum lifted to the starting position, check that the jaws are aligned. Knife
Check that the distance between the jaws is 3 mm ± 0.5 mm, centered between the two jaws. Knife
Make sure it is sharp enough. Poor knife sharpness has an adverse effect on test results.
LA.2
The tear length of the test piece can be confirmed on a paper test piece. Grasp the paper specimen correctly and use a knife to
Make a notch of mm ± 0.5 mm. The test piece with the notch has a tear length of 43 mm ± 0.5 mm
Adjust knife height as shown.
LA.3
The levelness of the test equipment is very important. Shaking of the equipment while the pendulum swings is a major source of error.
Becomes While the pendulum swings, secure the device firmly so that the device does not feel shaking. Water embedded in equipment
Level the device horizontally with a flatware.
LA.4
With the movable jaws closed without mounting the test piece, the horizontal device was turned several times and the friction resistance of the bear
Check the stop of the zero pointer on the pointer, the pointer or the reading of the zero point. The zero point is determined by three consecutive check
If the tolerance is within ± 1% of the needle scale, the device is considered to be properly adjusted.
LA.5
For equipment graduated in units other than Newton, use the conversion factor determined by the manufacturer of the equipment.
use.
143
L 1096： 2010
Annex LB
(reference)
LB.1 Consignment samples (number of pieces taken from cargo or lot)

From cargo or lot, Randomly collect a predetermined number of cloths described in (1). Damaged or not (wet) during transport
Table LB.1
Table LB.1
3 or less 1
4-10 2
11-30 3
31-75 4
76 or more 5
LB.2 Number of test samples

Cut a test sample of at least 1 m in length from each piece of consignment material (at least 3 m away from the end of the piece)
Random from location).
Wrinkles or visually flawed parts shall not be included in the test sample.
144
L 1096： 2010
Annex LC
(reference)
Example of a pattern for cutting a test piece from a test sample
Unit: mm
1 Fabric edge
2 Specimen for warp tearing
3 Specimen for weft tearing
4 Warp direction
− The place to cut the test piece from the test sample
Figure LC.1
145
L 1096： 2010
Annex LD
(Reference)
References
ISO 13934-1 : 1999, Textiles-Tensile properties of fabrics-Part 1: Determination of maximum force and
elongation at maximum force using the strip method
ISO 13934-2 : 1999, Textiles-Tensile properties of fabrics-Part 2: Determination of maximum force using the
grab method
ISO 13935-1 : 1999, Textiles − Seam tensile properties of fabrics and made-up textile articles − Part 1:
Determination of maximum force to seam rupture using the strip method
ISO 13935-2 : 1999, Textiles − Seam tensile properties of fabrics and made-up textile articles − Part 2:
Determination of maximum force to seam rupture using the grab method
ISO 13936-1 , Textiles-Determination of the slippage resistance of yarns at a seam in woven fabrics-Part 1:
Fixed seam opening method
ISO 13937-1 : 2000, Textiles-Tear properties of fabrics-Part 1: Determination of tear force using ballistic
pendulum method (Elmendorf)
ISO 13937-2 : 2000, Textiles-Tear properties of fabrics-Part 2: Determination of tear force of trouser-shaped test
specimens (Single tear method)
ISO 13937-3 : 2000, Textiles-Tear properties of fabrics-Part 3: Determination of tear force of wing-shaped test
specimens (Single tear method)
ISO 13937-4 : 2000, Textiles-Tear properties of fabrics-Part 4: Determination of tear force of tongue-shaped test
specimens (Double tear test)
ISO 4674-1 : 2003, Rubber-or plastics-coated fabrics-Determination of tear resistance-Part 1: Constant rate of
tear methods
ISO 9073-4 : 1997, Textiles-Test methods for nonwovens-Part 4: Determination of tear resistance
146
L 1096： 2010
Annex M
(Regulation)
Textile products-Burst characteristics of fabric-
Measurement of burst strength and burst expansion (hydraulic method)
This annex was issued as the first edition in 1999 ISO 13938-1 , Textiles-Bursting properties of fabrics-
Part 1: Changed technical content based on Hydraulic method for determination of bursting strength and bursting distension
It was created without doing.
M.1 Scope of application
This annex specifies a hydraulic method for measuring the bursting strength and bursting swelling of fabrics. This annex
And a constant speed pressurization by a pump device.
The method can be applied to knit, woven, non-woven and laminated fabrics. Made with other techniques
May be applicable to finished fabrics. This measurement is suitable for temperature- and humidity-controlled specimens or wet specimens.
For pressures up to 800 kPa, either hydraulic or pneumatic burst testers
From the measured data,
There is no significant difference in tear strength results. This pressure range covers most of the performance assumed for general clothing.
You. The hydraulic method is more suitable for testing special textile products that require high burst pressures.
Note ISO 13938-2 Specifies the pneumatic method.
M.2 Reference standards

In these cited standards, the year in which the year is added applies the edition of the stated year, and the later revised edition (including supplements)
No.) Does not apply. Normative references without a year are the latest versions (including
). supplements).
ISO 139 : 1973, Textiles-Standard atmospheres for conditioning and testing
measuring equipment
M.3 Terms and definitions

M.3.1
Test area
The area of the specimen in the circular clamping device.
M.3.2
Burst pressure (pressure at burst)
The maximum pressure applied before the specimen mounted on the diaphragm bursts.
M.3.3
Burst strength (burst strength)
Pressure obtained by subtracting diaphragm pressure from average burst pressure.
147
L 1096： 2010
M.3.4
Diaphragm pressure
The pressure applied to the diaphragm to expand the specimen to the average burst expansion without mounting the specimen.
M.3.5
Burst expansion (expansion at burst)
The degree of swelling of a test piece when subjected to burst pressure. It is expressed either in height or volume at the time of rupture.
M.3.6
Burst height
The distance between the top surface of the specimen before inflation and the apex of the specimen when burst pressure is applied.
M.3.7
Burst capacity
The volume of fluid injected to burst pressure.
M.3.8
Time to rupture
The time required to expand the specimen until it bursts.
M.4 principle
The test specimen covered with an inflatable diaphragm is fixed with a circular clamping ring. Diaphragm fluid
Inject under the ram and pressurize to expand the diaphragm and dough. Unit time until the specimen bursts
Inject the fluid at a constant rate and measure the burst strength and burst expansion.
M.5 sampling
The test sample is selected according to the procedure described in the material specification of the dough or the agreement between the delivery an
If there is no sampling procedure Annex MA Shown in Bent and wrinkled parts, ears at both ends and their
Parts that do not represent the dough are excluded. With careful handling of the clamping device, the dough can be cut without cutting the specimen.
You can also test.
M.6 apparatus
M.6.1 Burst testing machine
The burst tester ISO 10012 Weighing confirmation shall be carried out. The burst tester must meet the following requirements:
Section must be met.
Three Three
M.6.1.1 The test equipment is 100 cm~per
500minute
cm Up to various flow rate settings per unit time
It must be able to perform quantitative injection within ± 10%. If the device does not have the ability to adjust the flow rate,
The time to rupture of the piece shall be set to 20 s ± 5 s and shall be stated in the test report.
M.6.1.2 Burst pressure is displayed with an accuracy of ± 2% of the entire scale range beyond the first 20%
Shall be.
M.6.1.3 The height at the time of rupture shall be indicated with an accuracy of ± 1 mm up to 70 mm. The zero point of the measuring gauge is the th
It can be adjusted according to the situation.
M.6.1.4 There shall be means to indicate the volume of fluid at the time of rupture to within ± 2% of the indicated value (if possible).
Two Two
M.6.1.5 Test area 50 cm (Diameter 79.8 mm) can be used. 50 cm The recommended test area cannot be applied
148
L 1096： 2010
Two Two Two

In the following cases, the test area should
(Diameter
be 100 112.8
cm. mm)
, 10 cm (Diameter 35.7 mm) or 7.3 cm (30.5 mm diameter)
It may be.
-When it cannot be applied to existing test equipment.
-When the fabric is high stretch, low stretch or other properties of the fabric.
-By agreement between the parties.
M.6.1.6 The tightening device shall be capable of firmly fixing the test piece without distortion, damage and slippage.
I do. The tightening ring may not be disturbed even with a highly inflatable fabric
It should be able to expand into an arch shape without having to do so. The inside diameter of the test ring shall be exactly ± 2 mm. Trial
The corners of the inner surface of the clamping ring that contacts the test piece may be slightly edged to prevent damage to the test piece.
M.6.1.7 Cover the clamping device with a safety cover while the specimen expands. The safety cover is designed to allow the specimen to expand
The child should be clearly visible.
M.6.1.8 The diaphragm shall meet the following requirements:
-Thickness up to 2 mm;
-There is a high degree of inflation;
− If the diaphragm is used repeatedly, Elastic within the range of burst heights observed during the test.
-Is durable to the fluid used for pressurization;
M.7 Temperature
・Standard
and humidity
conditions
Atmosphere for temperature control, humidity control, conditioning
ISO 139 and
by. In
testthe wet test,
No need for conditioning.
M.8 operation
M.8.1 Prior to the test, M.7 Temperature and humidity control and conditioning without tension. Condi
During shocking and testing, the specimens
M.7 Maintain the atmosphere specified in.
Two Two
M.8.2 M.6.1.5
50 cm Set the test area of ( reference)
. 50 cm for most fabrics, especially knitted fabrics
Test area is applicable.
Two
For low stretch fabrics, ie fabrics for technical applications (from past knowledge) , 100 cm Test area
Is recommended. If these conditions are not applicable or inappropriate, the terms of the agreement M.6.1.5
An alternative test area may be used. When comparing test results, use the same test area and the same pressurized flow rate.
It is necessary to test at
Three Three
/ Min ~ 500 cmSet one constant flow pressure value up to / min
M.8.3 100 cm, depending on test area and fabric requirements
I do. If constant flow pressurization is not applicable, perform a preliminary test and increase the expansion time so that the specimen bursts within 20
adjust.
M.8.4 The specimen is placed flat and tension-free on the diaphragm so that the surface is not distorted. Tightening part
Hold the test specimen in a circular holder, taking care not to scratch the part, and avoid slippage during the test.
And tighten. Adjust the zero point position so that the expansion recording device can be measured. Rupture with safety cover
Apply pressure to the specimen until
Return the device to its original starting position immediately after the rupture. Burst pressure, burst height and / or fluid volume at burst
Record. If the specimen ruptured near the edge of the clamping device, this shall be stated.
Damage due to the clamps occurring within 2 mm of the clamp line is excluded. At least 4 times in different places on the fabric
149
L 1096： 2010
Repeat the above test. The number of test pieces may be increased by agreement between the delivery and delivery parties.
M.8.5 Diaphragm correction
Test the diaphragm without the test specimen, using the same test area, fluid flow rate or burst time used in the above test.
Inflate to a number equal to the average burst height or average burst volume of the pieces. Diaphragm pressure at this time
To Diaphragm pressureRecord as
M.8.6 Wetting test
For the test in the wet state, EN ISO 3696 : Immerse for 1 hour at the temperature of 20 ℃ ± 2 ℃ in the third grade water specified in 1973
To Instead of water, an aqueous solution containing no more than 1 g of nonionic wetting agent per liter may be used. test
Remove the piece from the dipping solution and immediately blot excess water
M.8.2with
~ M.8.5
blotting
Testpaper.
by the following procedure.
Note In the tropics ISO 139 : 1973.
M.9 Calculation and display of results

M.9.1 Calculate the arithmetic mean of the burst pressure in kilopascals (kPa).M.8.5 Diaphragm pressure measured at
(Kilopascal) is subtracted to calculate the burst strength. The result is rounded to three significant digits.
M.9.2 Calculate the arithmetic mean of the indicated burst heights in millimeters (mm). The result is rounded to two significant figures.
Three
M.9.3 If necessary, cubic centimeters (cm Calculate the arithmetic mean of the fluid volume at the time of rupture indicated in ()).
The result is rounded to three significant digits.
M.9.4 If necessary, the coefficient of variation, burst pressure and burst height and, if necessary, 95% of the volume at burst
Calculate confidence limits. The coefficient of variation is rounded to the nearest 0.1%, and the 95% confidence limit is rounded to the mean.
M.10 Test report

M.10.1 General matters
The report of this test shall be as follows.
b) Procedures for verification of test sample certification and sampling, as necessary
c) Manufacturer and model number of the burst tester used
d) Test area in square centimeters
e) Fluid flow or time to rupture
f) Number of specimens subjected to the test, number of ruptures near the clamping device, and number of excluded tests
g) Observations on rupture behavior (eg ruptured in one or both yarn directions)
h) Test condition (whether temperature and humidity control and conditioning, or wet test)
i) Deviations from prescribed test procedures
M.10.2 Test results
The results of the test shall be as follows.
a) Average burst strength in kilopascals (kPa)
b) Average burst height in millimeters (mm)
Three
c) If necessary, cubic centimeters (cm ) Average fluid volume at burst in units
d) Coefficient of variation in percent (%) of the measurement, if necessary
e) 95% confidence limits for the mean, if necessary
150
L 1096： 2010
Annex MA
(reference)
Selection of test area
If there is no dough sampling procedure, Figure MA.1

May be used with reference to the example shown in FIG.
− Recommended test location or sample location

Figure MA.1
151
L 1096： 2010
Annex N
(normative)
Textile products-Method for evaluating the appearance smoothness of fabric after wa
This annex was issued as the third edition in 2009 ISO 7768 , Textiles-Test method for assessing the
It was created based on the smoothness appearance of fabrics after cleansing without changing the technical content.
N.1 Scope of application

This annex specifies whether the fabric after one or several launderings retains its smooth appearance prior to laundering.
Specify the method of evaluation.
This method ISO 6330 Developed primarily for the use of Type B household washing machines as specified in
However, it is possible to use a type A washing machine. This method also works after other washing operations.
Can also be used for evaluation of appearance smoothness.
Note Printed patterns or patterns can make the fabric wrinkles less noticeable,
That undermine the importance of the concept of appearance smoothness to provide consumers with fabrics that do not require
is not.
N.2 Reference standards

). supplements).
ISO 105-A03 , Textiles-Tests for color fastness-Part A03: Gray scale for assessing staining
ISO 3175 (all parts), Textiles-Professional care, drycleaning and wetcleaning of fabrics and garments
ISO 6330 , Textiles-Domestic washing and drying procedures for textile testing
N.3 principle
An operation simulating a washing process is performed on the test piece of fabric. ByISO
agreement
6330 Homes
between
specified
the delivery
in and delivery parties,
One or a series of washing and drying
ISOoperations
3175 Perform one of the operations by the professionals specified in the standard.
N.4 apparatus
N.4.1 ISO 6330 Washing and drying equipment specified in Commercial laundry cleaning equipment as specified in
ISO 3175
N.4.2 illumination
The evaluationFigure
place isA dark room equipped with the overhead light source arrangement and the following equipment shown in (1). Lamp dimensi
N.1
A piece longer than the entire surface width of the piece and the standard replica is selected.
N.4.2.1 White fluorescent lamp :( CW
cool white ) 2 pieces
: At least two lamps of at least 2 m long shall be shielded
Lay them side by side without attaching a lath plate.
N.4.2.2 : Those
White enamel reflection plate without a shield plate or glass plate.
1 sheet
N.4.2.3 Specimen holder 1 piece
N.4.2.4 Thick plywood of observation
: ISOplate 1 sheet
105-A03 Equivalent to gray scale class 2 (No. 2) for contamination evaluation specified in
152
L 1096： 2010
Thick plywood painted in gray color.

N.4.3 Standard three-dimensional replica for evaluation of appearance smoothness ( see Figure N.2 )
Note The replicas shown are for illustrative purposes. This replica is
Figure N.2 AATCC Technology
Center (One Davis Drive, POBOX 12215, Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27709-2215, USA;
Tel: 919-549-8141; Fax: + 919-549-8933; http://www.aatcc.org/).
N.5 Test pieces

Three test pieces were cut in a size of 38 cm x 38 cm in parallel with the length direction, and the edges were cut in a jig to prevent fraying.
And mark the length direction.
N.6 operation
N.6.1 By agreement between the delivery ISO
and delivery
6330 Or parties,
ISO 3175 One of the washing operations specified in
Process the specimen.
N.6.2 If necessary, repeat the selected process four times, for a total of five processes.
N.6.3 ISO 139 The test piece shall be kept perpendicular to its length for a minimum of 4 hours and a maximum of 24 hours without distortion.
Spread out and hang, and perform temperature and humidity control and conditioning.
N.6.4 Evaluation
N.6.4.1 Each of the three observers independently grades the treated specimen.
N.6.4.2 Figure Observation
N.1 board ( N.4.2.4 ) Mount the test piece on top so that the length direction is vertical.
Standard three-dimensional replicas are placed on both sides of the specimen to facilitate comparative
Overhead fluorescent
evaluation
( N.4.2.1light
and
) grading.
Turn off all light sources in the room so that is the only light source on the viewing board. Many observers use the side wall near the observation plate
Since we have experienced that the reflected light interferes with the grading results, we have to blacken the side walls to eliminate the reflection obst
It is desirable to paint well or to attach blackout curtains on both sides of the observation board.
N.6.4.3 The observer stands 1.2 m away from the viewing plate and in front of the specimen. (Arbitrarily) 1.5m eye height
I tried to raise or lower, but it is clear that if the observer's height is a standard variation, it does not affect the grading.
ing.
N.6.4.4 Grade the standard replica closest to the appearance of the specimen. Specimen appearance clearly two standards
If it is judged to be intermediate between the replicas, the intermediate value of the standardTable
replica
reference)
is rated
N.1 . (
The SA-5 rating is the same as the SA-5 replica, with the smoothest appearance and the best appearance before processing.
To indicate that On the other hand, the rating of SA-1 is the same as SA-1 replica, and it has the worst smooth appearance
This indicates that the original appearance retention is the worst.
N.6.4.5 Similarly, the observer rates each of the remaining two specimens individually. The other two observers also
Independent rating is done in the same way.
Note This information is provided for the convenience of the user of this standard.
ISO Recommend this product
Not something. Substantial products may be used as long as they show equivalent evaluation results.
153
L 1096： 2010
Unit m
1 Replica 2 Specimen 3 Observation plate 4 Fluorescent lamp installation example
Figure −N.1
Observe test sample
・Lighting equipment for evaluation
Figure −N.2
replica
154
L 1096： 2010
Table −
N.1
Grading of fabric smoothness
Rating grade Appearance smoothness
SA-5 Appearance smoothness equivalent to SA-5 standard replica
4.5 Intermediate appearance smoothness between SA-4 standard and SA-5 standard
3.5 Intermediate appearance smoothness between SA-3 standard replica and SA-4 standard replica
N.7 Presentation of test results

Three observers calculate the average of nine observations rated on three specimens. Average in 0.5 level
Even report a close rating grade.
Note Accuracy and accuracy Annex NA Good to follow.
N.8 Test report

b) Details of the evaluated sample
c) Details of the washing operation performed
d) Number of washing
e) N.7 Calculated by Rating grade of fabric smoothness indicated by
Table N.1
f) Details of deviation from the prescribed operation
155
L 1096： 2010
Annex NA
(reference)
Accuracy and accuracy
In 1980, eight US laboratories tested four different fabrics.

The distribution is not normal because the distribution of the data is not normal and the replica class is limited and discontinuous.
It was determined that the analytical method was not applicable. The expected value of the laboratory test results is calculated from the distribution of
The data was analyzed by calculation.
The data showed that one of the observers rated three specimens at the following frequencies:
− Rating all three specimens to the same replica grade 0.55
− Two specimens are rated to the same replica grade and the other to another replica grade.
− All three specimens are assigned different replica grades 0.05
Also, it is extremely unlikely that the rating grades of three specimens will jump over the adjacent replica grades.
(Rare). This indicates that observer ratings are highly reproducible. Observer Rating Grade
From the distribution
The distribution
of of laboratory test results was calculated for each replica, including a rating of 0.5 grade.
Improved accuracy across all SA replicas.
For a laboratory of the same level, the marginal difference D between the test levels of the two laboratories was determined from the frequency dist
Calculated.
Marginal difference Confidence level
D> 0.17 P ≧ 0.95
D ≧ 0.25 P ≧ 0.99
When comparing test results from two or more laboratories, the laboratories must be
It is recommended to clarify. For this purpose, Fabrics with a known history and performance can be used.
Difference between laboratory test results (on the same fabric under the same wash and dry conditions) is 1/4 (0.25) replica units
If greater than or equal to, the difference is statistically significant at a confidence level P of 0.99 or greater.
A large difference of this figure or more indicates that there is a difference in laboratory levels, and
Indicates that a comparison is needed.
The actual numerical value of appearance smoothness after repeated home washing is limited to the test method used for the evaluation test.
There is no single test method that measures the true value. To evaluate this characteristic,
Is not known.
156
L 1096： 2010
Annex O
(normative)
Textile products-measurement of air permeability of fabrics
This annex was issued as the first edition in 1995 ISO 9237 , Textiles-Determination of the permeability of
It was created based on fabrics to air without changing the technical contents.
O.1 Scope of application

This annex specifies a method for measuring the permeability of fabrics. This method can be used in industries involving special technologies.
Applicable to most types of breathable fabrics, including fabrics, nonwovens and clothing.
O.2 Reference standards

In these cited standards, the edition of the stated year applies, with subsequent revisions
) Does not
(including
apply. supplements).
ISO 48 : 1994, Rubber, vulcanized or thermoplastic-Determination of hardness (hardness between 10 IRHD
and 100 IRHD)
ISO 139 : 1973, Textiles-Standard atmospheres for conditioning and testing
measuring equipment
O.3 Definition
The definitions of the main terms used in this annex are as follows.
O.3.1
Breathable
Air flow rate (mm / s) that penetrates vertically through the specimen under specified area, pressure
. difference and time
O.4 principle
Specimens are tested for a specified time, with a specified pressure difference, at a specified pressure difference, through the specified area of the d
Measure the amount of air when passing.
O.5 Sample collection

The sample is selected according to the procedure specified in the material specification of the fabric, or the sample is agreed upon by the delivery
Is selected. If there is no specification, Annex OB According to the example of sampling of the sample shown in (1).
O.6 Standard condition for adjustment and test

The standard conditions for pre-treatment, adjustment
ISO 139 According
and testingtoare:
the regulations.
O.7 apparatus
To confirm the accuracy of theISO
test10012
equipment,
Done by
157
L 1096： 2010
O.7.1 Round specimen holder

5 cmTwo Two
, 20 cm , 50 cm
Two Two
And 100 cm Orifices suitable for testing each area. Test surface
The product tolerance shall not exceed ± 0.5%.
Note Particularly on large test surfaces, a support suitable for the specimen is desirable.
O.7.2 Clamping device
A test piece that can be firmly tightened without distortion.
Note Care is taken to prevent air leaks from around the edges of the specimen. Instead, separate air leaks
It may be measured and subtracted from the test results.
O.7.3 Guard ring device
Clamp ( O.7.2 ) That can be used arbitrarily in conjunction with OA.2.1 reference)
.
O.7.4 Barometer or manometer
With a gauge connected to the test tube, the pressure difference when passing through the test surface is 50 Pa, 100 Pa, 200 Pa and 500 Pa ± 2%.
Indicate with the accuracy of
O.7.5 A device that sucks a constant amount of air
The pressure difference between the temperature and humidity adjusted air suctioned through the test piece holder and the permeation of the test pi
The one that regulates the flow rate to create
O.7.6 Flowmeter
, Volumetric meter or restrictor
Three
Air flow 1 dm Indicated with an accuracy of ± 2% in units of / min (1 L / min).
Note The flow meter or volume meter shall be 1 cm if the required accuracy of ±Three
/2%
s units
is maintained.
(or other appropriate
The flow rate of the air amount may be measured in units.
O.8 Sample preparation and test conditions

Prepare the sample before the test and perform the test in the standard
O.6 reference)
condition
. Desirable
for thetest
testconditions
( are as follows:
And
Two
The size of the test surface: 20 cm
− Pressure difference: 100 Pa for clothing fabric
-Pressure difference: 200 Pa for industrial dough
If these pressure differences are not reached or not applicable, 50 Pa or
Two Two Two
May use any pressure difference of 500 Pa. Also, 5 cm , 50 cm Or 100 cm Any of the test areas
You may choose.
Note For comparison of the results, it is recommended to test with the same test area and the same pressure difference.
O.9 Test operation

Apply sufficient tension to remove wrinkles and place the specimen in a circular
O.7.1specimen
Refer to).
holder
Cloth
(
Make sure that there is no distortion on that plane. Avoid ears, folds and folded parts of the fabric
You. If the fabric has different air permeability on the front and back, the test report [ O.11 a) 2) three
See details below. To prevent air leakage, cover the lower pressure side with a test piece on one side and tighten the clamp.
You.
Suction fan or other device for forcing air through the specimen ( O.7.5 Start). Soshi
And gradually adjust the air volume until the pressure difference reaches through the test surface of the fabric according to the test conditions recomm
158
L 1096： 2010
I do. Air flow after at least 1 minute ( O.7.6 reference)

, Or the air flow when a certain state is reachedO.7.6
( reference)
Record Repeat the test at least 10 times at different positions on the sample under the same conditions.
Note 1 For advice on calibrating test equipment and performing tests, OA Shown in
Annex
Three
Note 2 For example, in a device such as a volume meter, the air volume is about 10 dm to guarantee
Need thethe
volume
required
of accuracy.
May be.
O.10 Calculation and display of results

O.10.1 Calculate the mean and variability (to the nearest 0.1%) of each measurement and describe the 95% confidence interval.
O.10.2 Calculate the air permeability R (mm / s) by the following formula .
qv
R= ×167
A
here, R : Breathability (mm / s)
Three
q v : Average value of air velocity [dm / min (L / min)]
Two
A : Fabric area under test (cm )
Three Two Two
167: Replacement coefficient
/ min [dm
/ cm(L / min / cm) To mm / s]
O.10.3 For open fabrics and nonwovens, the permeability R (m / s) may be expressed by the following formula:
qv
R= ×167
A
here, R : Breathability (mm / s)
Three
q v : Average value of air velocity [dm/ min (L / min)]
Two
A : Fabric area under test (cm )
O.10.4 O.10.2 Or O.10.3 The 95% confidence interval is represented by the unit specified
O.10.2 Or in,O.10.3 Value obtained in
Is rounded to 2% to represent the result of the permeability R.
O.11 Test report

a) General information
1) To the effect of this annex. For example,
2) Complete information to identify the sample subjected to the test, if necessary, indication of the direction of air passing through the fabric
Two
3) Test area used (cm )
Pressure difference used (Pa)
Four)
Number of test pieces
Five)
6) Test adjustment used and standard conditions for testing
7) Deviations from prescribed operation
b) Test results
1) Average permeability R (mm / s or m / s if applicable)
2) Rate of change(%)
3) 95 % Confidence interval (mm / s or m / s if applicable)
159
L 1096： 2010
Annex OA
(Regulation)
Advice on calibrating the testing machine and performing the test
OA.1 Equipment inspection and calibration

For regular use once a week; for rare use before testing, after moving the equipment or after repair.
It is advisable to calibrate the equipment and check for proper functioning. Calibration of the equipment should be performed periodically at intervals
It is better to check in comparison with a reference standard.
barometer(O.7.4 Calibration) should be performed periodically. Throttle measurement with known air permeability at specified pressure difference
Calibration check plates with values shall be used for calibration. To avoid air leaks, use circular test specimen
Ruda ( O.7.1 Tighten the check plate in the correct position to ensure reproducibility. For specific equipment
The preferred calibration method should be based on the specifications and required accuracy of the equipment.
OA.2 Exam introduction

OA.2.1 Annular guard ring device ( O.7.3 See) to prevent air leakage from the rim. Gar
The pressure difference across the dring is measured by a separate barometerO.7.4
or manometer
). (
The air that has passed through the guard ringO.7.6
is See). Test surface and Gardrin
If the pressure differential across the test surface is uniform, air cannot enter and exit the test surface from the rim.
It becomes.
If the measuring device does not have a guard ring, cover the sample with a rubber plate of the same size as the sample.
Measure the rate of edge leakage. Rubber plates are 1 mm to 2 mm thick and have a hardness ISO 48 To
Therefore, the test shall be 651 IRHD to 701 IRHD or equivalent.
OA.2.2 Clamps for tightening the fabric surface shall have an appropriate grade of rubber applied to the
O.7.2 reference)
surface
. gas(
The bracket has a thickness of 2.5 mm and
ISO 48hardness.
When tested according to 651 IRHD to 701 IRHD, or
Equivalent.
OA.2.3 Care should be taken when tightening the specimen in the clamp not to distort or stretch it.
160
L 1096： 2010
Annex OB
(Regulation)
Desired sample collection method
OB.1 Preparation of consignment samples (number of specimens taken from cargo or lot)
To prepare consignment samples, at least from the cargo or lot Table OB.1
Run the required number of samples specified in
Collect them at the dam. This consignment sample includes samples that have been damaged or lost during transportation.
Try not to get caught.
Table OB.1
Number of samples in cargo or lotNumber of test pieces of cargo sample
3 or less 1
4
~ 10 2 11 ~ 30 3
31 ~ 75 4
76 or more 5
OB.2 Preparation of test sample

Cut a test sample of 1 m or more over the entire width from each sample constituting the consignment sample.
At a distance of at least 3 m from a randomly selected location) . The test sample shall be visible on the wrinkled area or visually.
Make sure that there are no parts that can be seen.
161
L 1096： 2010
Annex P
(Regulation)
Textile products-pH measurement of water extract
This annex was issued as the third edition in 2005 ISO 3071 , Textiles-Determination of pH of aqueous
It was created based on extract without changing the technical contents.
The pH value of the aqueous extract of a textile is a useful indicator of the processing history of the textile. In addition, various shapes
It is required that the pH value of the aqueous extract of the fibrous product be in a specific range of acidity or alkalinity.
Increasingly common.
P.1 Scope of application

This annex specifies a method for measuring the pH value of aqueous extracts of textile products. This method
And the like.
P.2 Reference standards

For referenced standards, the year edition of the description applies.
ISO 3696 : 1987, Water for analytical laboratory use-Specification and test methods
P.3 Terms and definitions

The terms and definitions used in this International Standard are as follows.
P.3.1
pH
Common logarithm of hydrogen ion concentration of extract
P.4 principle
The pH value of the aqueous extract of the textile is measured electrochemically at room temperature using a glass electrode.
P.5 reagent
All reagents used shall be certified as analytical reagent grade.
P.5.1 Distilled or deionized water
ISO 3696 Grade 3 or higher water as specified in, with a pH of 5.0 to 7.5. pH values are used first
Sometimes measure and confirm. If the pH is not within the specified range, redistill it in a chemically resistant glass container.
Shall be. Acids or organics are steamed with 1 g / L potassium permanganate and 4 g / L sodium hydroxide.
Can be removed. Alkali (e.g., in the presence of ammonia) can be removed by adding a dilute sulfuric acid solution.
Can be removed. If the distilled water is not grade 3, add 100 mL of the distilled water to a beaker.
Boil gently for 10 minutes ± 1 minute, cover and allow to cool to room temperature.
P.5.2 Potassium chloride aqueous solution
Adjust to 0.1 mol / L with distilled or deionized water.
162
L 1096： 2010
P.5.3 Buffer
Annex
To calibrate the pH meter before measurement, use a buffer with a pH close to the PAbeFollow
one to measured.
the method described in
To be prepared. It is advisable to use buffers with a pH of around 4.7 and 9.
P.6 apparatus
P.6.1 Glass or polypropylene flask with stopper Chemical resistant glass for preparing water extract or
Polypropylene flask.
Note Glassware used for this test shall be filled with distilled water and stored separately for this purpose only.
It is desirable to put.
P.6.2 Shaker Sufficient rotation or rotation to allow rapid liquid transfer and displacement between the fiber material and the extract
Means reciprocating motion. It suffices to have at least 60 reciprocating operations per minute or at least 30 rotating operations per minute.
P.6.3 beaker 150 mL capacity chemical resistant ( P.6.1 of Notereference)
.
P.6.4 Rod Chemical resistant ( P.6.1 of Note reference)
.
P.6.5 It has a glass electrode and can measure at least the pH scale of 0.1.
pH Total
P.6.6 Balance Accurate to 0.01 g.
P.6.7 Capacity 1 L flask Class A quality.
P.7 Preparation of test sample

P.7.1 Collect a sufficient quantity of test samples to represent the cargo to be tested and to prepare the required number of test samples.
The test sample is cut into small pieces of about 5 mm width or a rapidly wettable size.
P.7.2 Avoid touching the sample as much as possible to avoid contamination. 2.00 g ±
Take three test samples of 0.05 g.
P.8 operation
P.8.1 Preparation of water extract
Prepare three water extracts at room temperature as follows.
Test sample and water ( ) Or potassium chloride aqueousP.5.2
P.5.1 solution
) Into( a stoppered flask ( P.6.1 ), And the sample is
Shake by hand for a short time to get a good wet. Then shake on a shaker for 2 hours ± 5 minutes. Extraction
Record the temperature of the liquid used (water or potassium chloride solution).
P.8.2 Measurement of extract pH
First, calibrate the pH meter at the temperature of the extract. Calibrate and check the pH meter with the two buffers. pH finger
Immerse the electrode several times in the same solution (water or potassium chloride solution) used to prepare the extract until the readings are stabl
I do. Transfer the first extract to a beaker, immediately immerse the electrode to a depth of at least 10 mm, and reduce the pH value.
Gently stir (stir) with a stick until determined (pH value of this solution is not recorded) .
Transfer the second extract to another beaker and immediately immerse the electrode to a depth of at least 10 mm without washing.
Leave without stirring (stirring) until the pH value stabilizes. Record this pH value.
Pour the third extract into another beaker and immediately immerse the electrode to a depth of at least 10 mm without washing.
Soak without stirring until the pH value is stable. Record this pH value.
Record the pH values of the second and third extracts as the first and second measurements.
163
L 1096： 2010
P.9 Calculation
If the difference between the two measured values in the nearest 0.1 pH unit is more than 0.2, repeat the above procedure with another test sample.
Do it again. Once two valid measurements have been obtained, determine the average.
P.10 accuracy
The following results were obtained when seven samples were tested at nine laboratories and statistical analysis was performed.
-Water ( P.5.1 Use) : Reproducibility limit R = 1.7 pH
-Potassium chloride solution (extract P.5.2 ): Reproducibility limit R = 1.1 pH
Note Statistical analysis
JISis Z 8402-2 [Measurement method and accuracy of measurement results (accuracy and precision)-Part 2: Standard
Basic Method for Obtaining Repeatability and Reproducibility of Measurement Method].
P.11 Test report

b) Average pH value in the nearest 0.1 pH unit
c) Type of solution used (water or potassium chloride solution)
d) Extract pH value
e) Extract temperature
f) Factors that may have affected the results, including the fact that the test sample was difficult to wet
g) Test date
164
L 1096： 2010
Annex PA
(reference)
Adjustment of standard buffer
PA.1 General
Use only chemicals that are certified as analytical reagent grade.
ISO 3696 Prepare using water of the third grade or higher specified in.
PA.2 pH 4.0 potassium phthalate solution ( 0.05 mol / L )

Potassium phthalate (KHC 8 HFour
OFour
) Dissolve 10.21 g in distilled or deionized water in a 1 L volumetric flask and add 1 L
Dilute to scale. The pH of this solution is 4.00 at 20 ° C and 4.01 at 25 ° C.
PA.3 pH 6.9 Potassium dihydrogen orthophosphate and disodium hydrogen orthophosphate solution ( 0.08 mol / L )
PO
Potassium dihydrogen orthophosphateTwo
(KH HPOFour
) 3.9 g and disodium hydrogen orthophosphate (NaTwo
Four 3.54 g
Take in a 1 L volumetric flask, dissolve in distilled or deionized water, and dilute to the 1 L scale. The pH of this solution is
6.87 at 20 ° C and 6.86 at 25 ° C.
PA.4 pH 9.2 sodium borate solution ( 0.01 mol / L )

Dissolve 3.80 g of sodium borate decahydrate in distilled or deionized water in a 1 L volumetric flask and scale to 1 L.
Dilute with. The pH of this solution is 9.23 at 20 ° C and 9.18 at 25 ° C.
Annex JA
(reference)
JIS Comparison table with corresponding international
JIS 1096 : 2010 Fabric testing method for woven and knitted fabrics The numbers, years and names of international
See note standards
3 . are
(I) JIS regulations (II) (III) International Standards (IV) Clause of technical difference between JIS (V)
andTechnical
internationa
dif
International Standard Evaluation and content Reasons and fut
Number
Clause number Content Clause Content Articles Content of technical differences
And title number Evaluation of
range fabrics and knittedISO
1 ApplicableWoven 1
fabric production add of
Table of Organization and weave to the fabric
JIS Is a non- ISO standard woven JIS
fabric
Is used in ea
of the, land
enclosed the general characteristics7211-1 How to Display such individual test methods Testing method for ground and knitted
For fabric
the evaluatio
in gen
Defines the test method toISO
be evaluated Stipulated. Added and stipulated the law. Add items.
. 22198 , ISO The standa
ISO 3801 , Items are specif
ISO JIS test method
7211-6 ISO Consider ad
Such
2 cited Tadashi
rating
3 term及 JIS L 0105 , JIS L Three The length of the piece goods,Change
the full widthJIS Is agoods
piece comprehensive quotation of
There
JIS is
terms
no subs
0208 , JIS L 0211 etc.
beauty definition used in the detail specification such as Provisions.
The term is quoted and prescribed. defining a Ru terms.
4 Test The types of tests were listed not listed. add to JIS Describes the test items. There is no subs
types .
5 test conditions
For the test location, absolute dry mass, Test location, the preparation Change
of the sampleJIS Is, JIS L 0105 wrapped cited ISO Standards
matter official moisture content, temperature and throat ISO 139 cited provisions of the. Defined collectively. And there is no
humidity, refer to JIS L 0105 . ISO The standard quotes ISO 139
Quoted provisions. And that but, JIS L 0105 to correspond to the
portion that is equivalent.
166
L 1096 ： 2010
(I) JIS regulations (II) (III) International Standards (IV) Evaluation of technical differences between JIS
(V) Reasons
and interna
for
International Standard for each clause and their contents and future meas
Clause number Content Number Clause Content Articles Content of technical differences
6 sample及 JIS L 0105 Quote ISO 3801 , 5, Standard for adjustment and testing
Change JIS Shall be used for sample collection
Substantial
and prepara
diffe
beauty test pieces of specimens6,received
Regulations. The number ISO 6, 7 State, operation (pre-adjustment) of Comprehensively specified by item.Absent.
taken及of in agreement between transient
7211-3 parties the provisions in the etc.. ISO The standard states that the test method
preparation beauty
can be increased or decreased.
Such And the standard for adjustment and testing.
Specified in quasi-state.
7 Round of the numerical value of the test results add to JIS Unifies the rounding of numbersThere is
How to roundtonumbers
Me How to JIS Z 8401 the Provisions for. no substantial d
Quoted provisions. ISO The standard describes procedures, calculatio
Display of results, regulations in the test report
constant.
8 test how Fabric, use a design paper
Act had, the warp and weft
8.1 organization 6 Fabric, using the design paper, The knitted
fabric offabri
the
Combination organizationISOchart, Change JIS Is used to determine the fabric and
expressed by letters or symbols.
7211-1 distribution of this thread by thread及beauty and was
Regulations. that.
Knitted fabric is a combination of knitting yarns the column, through the draft, reed ISO Standards are textiles
The JIS L 0200 defined The threading and weaving are And
organization chart of the character or represented by an organization chart . stipulate the organization of the penetrating and we
represented by the symbol.
8.2.1 Width Use and metal linear scaleISO 22198 8 Change JIS Means three different measurements.
ISO Standards a
have, the distance between both ears end rulerStandard
Measure both ends at right angles using a ISO is 5istimes dependingYes,
. The width on length
technical d
measurement. Cylindrical knitted fabric the distance between Or 10 measurements.
. Bi-foldthe outermost ends (length) have.
Measured in a flat state, When measured at,
twice the full width. twice the full width.
Depending on sample length
Defines the number of measurements.
Use a fiber tape measure
8.2.2 The length 8 Measure the overall length using
Change
a ruler. ISO Standards are for samples larger
ISOthan
Standards
1m a
of Measure the total length. The The measurement method of is specified.
Yes, technical d
measurement method is defined by the length of the sample . not.
(I) JIS regulations (II) (III) International Standards (IV) Evaluation of technical differences between (V)
JIS Reasons
and interna
for
Number
8.3.2 standardApprox. 200 mm x 200 mm ISO 3801 6 Standard condition, general atmosphere
Change JIS Is the standard area unit area ISO Unit length
to the quasi-state
And specimens taken standard In the unit length in each small sample Defines the mass of the slip. And the mass pe
single definitive
weighed mass state, single- mass and per unit of of ISO Standards include non-standard conditions.
because it is not
position areaper-position
equivalent area weight the mass of Ri surface product those other Unit
regulations
length and unit area identify, ISO fut
Two
Toorg / mExpressed by
The quality of Fixed. Stipulated mass. Argue.
amount
8.3.3 WovenISO 7211-6 Quoting, ISO 7 After removing non-fibrous material
Match
unit of product
Regulations. 7211- 6 Per unit area of the fabric
area per quality warp and weft
Rinotate defining a volume.
Yarn and by
the quality of this yarn
amount
8.4 ThicknessWith thickness measuringISO 5084
instrument, 8
one Using a thickness measuring Change JIS Are ordinary woven and knittedJIS
instrument, measure fabrics,
Is to specify
constant time and constant pressure Pressure for each haired fabric or knit
the thickness after 30 seconds under 1 kPa. There is no tech
Measure the thickness under. Regulations. Defining a force, a pressure is constant
defines the thickness of the can.
8.6.1 woven 5 locations on appropriateISO
sections The number of threads per 7 cm Change JIS Are five different 50 mm ISO Prescribes
Warp
material density ofand weft 7211-2 Regulations. There are no tec
Warp and transverse section of such
count the number of, respectively provisions the number of yarn.
calculate the unit length of the Re. ISO Depends on the characteristics of the fabric.
Method (visual degradation mirror or number of yar
yarns per cm by Sokki)
defines the number.
168
L 1096 ： 2010
(I) JIS regulations (II) (III) International Standards (IV) Evaluation of technical differences between JIS
(V) Reasons
and interna
for
Number
8.7 Yarn A method, a thread draw-cladISO test 8 Of the weaving shrinkage of the
Change
yarn in theJIS
fabric
Calculates the yarn weaving shrinkage
JIS Is the
ratio
load-e
shrinkage using the machine, load - 7211-3
extends Defines measurement method. In addition tail in
from the curve, vertical direction及 Two types are specified: a method using
Ri, ISOa test
yarnmac
St
organization of beauty good this way of direction yarn ISO Is the yarn straightening lengthis used as a me
Measure shrinkage. The method by the measuring device is specified.
Including harmo
B method, the initial load is applied, to consider Mot
the length was Tsu Zhang as soon true Tsu

Is from, vertical direction and
woven contraction of good this way direction of the yarn
measuring himself.
8.9.1.1 Apparent fineness of ISO 7 Change
Removed from the fabric of textile JIS Is the mass of the thread in theJIS
standard
Specifies
state
th
yarn 7211-5
Defines the apparent fineness of woven and knitted
measurement
yarn . side of the apparent finenessStipulates apparent fineness.
of the yarns However, in the
The apparent fineness of the yarn of the fabric defining the method. ISO Removes non-fibrous materials.
Calculates You.
Retrieved from fabric or not removing
apparent fineness from the mass of warp and weft yarns the yarn Ri out standard state or absolute
. plus commercial tolerances dry mass
The length of the mass and the yarn by the method
of the apparent fineness of the yarn regulations, inc
constant.
8.9.2 JIS L 1095 At 9.15 ISO 7 Specify the Change JIS L 1095 Corresponding international standard
ISO 7211-4 AndI
Number fromQuotation).
a) 7211-4 taken Is
method for measuring the twist of the yarn 2061 outtaken from
of the the yarn
woven package.
fabric. Unify the techni
Fixed. The Future revision
method for direct measurement of the thread that
7211-4 Removed from the fabric
Defines the measurement method for yarn twist. Its
measuring device respectively the same der
Ru, but some differences in measurement methods
is there.
JIS Reasons
and interna
for
International standard for each clause and their contents and future meas
number
8.14 Pull JIS As a rule, the story ISO 9 Fabric by strip method Change JIS The method is a constant-speedUsage
tension-type
of tensile
t
of及method (standard time 13934-1
ChoTsutomu-Up and humidity Of standard time and arguments at the timeUses a constant speed extension type
of wet testing
Assess themach
actu
beauty growth
during
rate Jun) and grab method (standard a measurement how Zhang strength Tadashi ISO The method uses a constant-speed extension-
, including the h
at the time of the quasi-time and wet) 4 constant. Limited, such as tensile speed to examine the
Specify the method. A methodISO(scan 9 Target of the dough by the grab method There are differences in test conditions.
trip method), labeling 13934-2 quasi-time and tensile strength of wet
field strip method or define the method of measuring of.
To cut strip method
the test piece created by Tsu by
then, using a tensile testing machine,
Measure the maximum load and elongation when cutting . Method B (grayed
Love method), tensile test
Using machine, most of the time of cutting
measuring a large load heavy及beauty Shin Beauty
constant. Method C (wet strike
The lip method) is similar
to the
standard method when wet in water at 20 ° C ± 2 ° C.
Specifies the law. Method D (wet
grab method) involves
immersion in water at 20 ° C ± 2 ° C.
And, standard and similar measurements
define a constant way.
ISO The law is the E method
2 How regulations and of Method F
constant.
170
L 1096 ： 2010
(I) JIS regulations (II) (III) International Standards (IV) Evaluation of technical differences between(V)
JISReasons
and intern
fo
International Standard for each clause and their contents and future mea
Number
8.17 the tear A method (single tongue ISO 9 Pendulum (Elmen Change JIS Are the four methods A to D. ISO The stand
strength , B method (double tan 13937-1
method) Of fabric by Dorf) method In addition, the pendulum method of
This
theisISO
a separa
met
Method)
, C method (Trapezo a method for measuring the tear strength Tadashi
is specified as the E method. there is no subs
Method and the D method constant.
Four sides of Njuramu Act)
defines the method. D method (pen
Juramu method), El
Mendorufu shaped tear test
using a machine, the machine direction及
Biyoko direction or Kwai
Le direction and course direction
load when tore
weight strength (tear strength)
Measurement.
In addition, the ISO
pendulum method is specified as the E method.
Fixed.
8.18 bursting Method A (Mullen method) ISO 8 Change JIS Is Method A and Method B In Japan,
strength extension type ) Burst strength of fabric at standard and wetInconditions
13938-1
and Method B (constant speed addition toby
ISO standards
hydraulic method tests have been
Law). A And the measurement side of the rupture expansion
The decompression
of method used is
We will conside
method (Mullen form method) the provisions of the Act. specified as the C method . .
is, Mullen-type test
Using machine, impact test pieces
at strength and fracture break-out
measuring the strength of the rubber septum of
And calculate the burst strength.
Also, the ISO
law is specified as the C method .
JIS Reasons
and interna
fo
Number
8.24 Wash濯 Method A ( ISO 7768 6 One or several home launderings Change JIS Agitated washing machine and Currently, the re
Also
wrinkles after method using an agitated washing machine) and Method Washed with cylinder type washing machine
B( specifies the method for evaluating the appearance
in addition
ofto濯操operation,
the dough after drying
ISO nonstandard
. It is being revis
Ru ISO 6330 or ISO 3175 pickling
method using a cylinder-type washing machine)
Specify the method. Method A involves The rinsing operation is specified as Method C.
washing
using an agitated washing machine (one time or 5
Times), of wrinkles after drying
judgment for standard-les-evaluation
decision in the replica.
Also, the ISO
law is specified as the C method .
A method (Frazier
8.26 emails care ISO 9237 9 How to measure the air permeability
Changeof the JIS
fabric
Uses a Frazier-type testing machine
Determine the a
of method) and Method B (gar Stipulated. In addition The future, ISO
two methods regulations Les form method) to the method of calculating the air to
permeability
consider the
fro
constant. Method A is fragile
Using Le type tester, measuring The air amount adjusting to a certain pressure diffe
air was used as the constant-pressure is integer, the test surface during specified time
trial from the type of pores breathability from air amount passing through
ISO method for calculation
Calculate the amount of air passing through the specimen . is specified as C method .
In addition, ISO C
Specifies the law.
8.37 ExtractionJIS Z 8805 Stipulate ISO 3071 8 How to measure the pH of theChange
water extractThere are no technical differences. In the future, tri
solution pH of PH measuring glass collector that Specifies the law. Consider unifica
using poles, of the extract
measured pH.
9 test report Match

Tsugesho
172
L 1096 ： 2010
JIS Reasons
and interna
fo
Number
Annex A ISO Organization chart − add to JIS Is a technology based on ISO 7211-1
(Regulation) As well as through traveling, Without changing the specific content, Supplemen
reed through and weave of the defined as the Annex.
regulations for the display method
Fixed.
Annex B ISO As a rule, dough − add to JIS Is a technology based on ISO 22198
(normative) For measuring width and length Without changing the subject matter
Regulations. Specified as a generic book.
Annex BA Temperature and humidity control, condition
(reference) Yoningu, relaxation treatment及
piece goods for beauty measured
way of placing the.
Annex C ISO As a law, textile − add to JIS Is technically based on ISO 3801
(normative) Unit length and unit surface Stipulated as an annex without alteration
measurement of the mass per product .
Stipulates the rules.
Annex D ISO As a rule, dough − add to JIS Is a technology based on ISO 7211-6
(Regulation) And per unit area Without changing the specific content, Supplemen
quality yarns and weft defined as the Annex.
regulations for measuring the amount
Fixed.
Annex E ISO As a law, dough and − add to JIS Is technically based on ISO 5084
(normative) And thickness measurement of textile products Attached without changing contents
Stipulates the rules. Stipulated as a certificate.
Annex EA Test site and press
(Regulation) Size average of Safutto
selection of pressure applied to the beauty
defined for-option.
Annex EB References
(Reference)
JIS Reasons
and interna
fo
Number
Annex F ISO Unit length − add to JIS Is a technology based on ISO 7211-2
(Regulation) Defines the Without changing the specific content, Supplemen
measurement of the number of yarns per hit . defined as the Annex.
Annex FA Tapered and parallel
(Regulation) Use the form Denshimeta
about how to use
the provisions.
Annex G ISO As a rule, in the dough − add to JIS Is a technology based on ISO 7211-3
(normative) Of the shrinkage of yarn Without changing the subject matter
Stipulates the rules. Specified as a generic book.
Annex GA Stipulated for initial load.
(normative)
Annex H ISO As a law, dough − add to JIS Is a technology based on ISO 7211-5
(normative) Of the thread taken out Without changing the subject matter
For the measurement of the hanging fineness Specified as a generic book.
defined.
Annex I ISO As a law, dough − add to JIS Is a technology based on ISO 7211-4
(Regulation) Good of yarn taken out al Without changing the specific content, Supplemen
regulations Reno measurement defined as the Annex.
constant.
Annex J ISO Method, tensile strength − add to JIS Is based on ISO 13934-1
(normative) Measurement of hardness and elongation Without changing the technical content
In, strip method Nitsu Specified as an annex.
defined have.
Annex J1 Recommended sampling
(reference) procedure
Annex J2 Testing from test samples
(reference) Piece cutout location
Annex J3 References
(Reference)
174
L 1096 ： 2010
JIS Reasons
and interna
fo
Number
Annex K ISO As a law, grabs − add to JIS Is based on ISO 13934-2
(Regulation) Defines the
Annex KA measurement
Recommendedofsampling
tensile strength by the method . Specified as an annex without any technical chang
(Regulation) Provision of procedure.
Annex KB Testing from test samples
(reference) Piece cutout location
Annex KC Grab
(Reference) placement for grab test
Annex KD References
(Reference)
Annex L ISO As a law, ballistic swing − add to JIS Is based on ISO 13937-1
(normative) Rico Act (Erumendoru
by the tear strength of the marks) Specified as an annex without any technical chang
Rules for measurement.
Annex LA Adjustment of test equipment and
(reference) Proof
Annex LB Test equipment adjustment and
(Reference) certification
Annex LC A
(Reference) pad for cutting a test specimen from a test sample
Example of turn
Annex LD References
(Reference)
Annex M ISO As a rule, burst strength − add to JIS Is based on ISO 13938-1
(normative) And burst swelling degree Without changing the technical content
For the measurement (liquid pressure method) Added as an annex.
defined.
Annex MA Selection of test area
(reference)
JIS Reasons
and interna
fo
Number
Annex N ISO As a rule, after washing − add to JIS Is technically based on ISO 7768
(Regulation) Appearance smoothness of the fabric of
how to evaluate the Added as an annex without change .
defined have.
Annex NA Accuracy and accuracy
(Reference)
Annex O ISO As a rule, dough − add to JIS Is technically based on ISO 9237
(normative) For the measurement of air permeability
defined. Added as an annex without change .
Annex OA Calibration and trial testing machine
(normative) according to the practice of test
provisions for advice.
Annex OB Defines
(normative) how to collect desirable samples .
Annex P ISO Water extraction − add to JIS Is technically based on ISO 3071
(normative) For the measurement of the pH of the liquid
defined. Added as an annex without change .
Annex PA Adjustment of standard buffer
(Reference)
JIS Overall assessment of the degree of correspondence

( ISO 3071 ,between
ISO 3801the
, ISO
product
5084and
, ISO
international
7211-1 , ISO
standards:
7211-2 , ISO 7211-3 , ISO 7211-4 , ISO 7211-5 , ISO 7
ISO 9237 , ISO 13934-1 , ISO 13934-2 , ISO 13937-1 , ISO 13938-1 and ISO 22198 , MOD)
176
L 1096 ： 2010
NOTE 1 The meaning of the term in the evaluation column of each Clause shall be as follows.
− Match …………… There is no technical difference.
− Addition …………… The specified items or contents that are not in the International Standard are added.
− Changes …………… The contents of the international standard have been changed.
NOTE 2 The meaning of the symbols in the overall evaluation column for the degree of correspondence between JIS and international standards is as
− MOD …………… International standards have been modified.
NOTE 3 Number, year and name of international standard
ISO 3071 : 2005, Textiles-Determination of pH of aqueous extract
ISO 3801 : 1977, Textiles-Woven fabrics-Determination of mass per unit length and mass per unit area
ISO 5084 : 1996, Textiles-Determination of thickness of textiles and textile products
ISO 7211-1 : 1984, Textiles-Woven fabrics-Construction-Methods of analysis-Part 1: Methods for the presentation of a weave diagram and plan
and lifting
ISO 7211-2 : 1984, Textiles-Woven fabrics-Construction-Methods of analysis-Part 2: Determination of number of threads per unit length
ISO 7211-3 : 1984, Textiles-Woven fabrics-Construction-Methods of analysis-Part 3: Determination of crimp of yarn in fabric
ISO 7211-4 : 1984, Textiles-Woven fabrics-Construction-Methods of analysis-Part 4: Determination of twist in yarn removed from fabric
ISO 7211-5 : 1984, Textiles-Woven fabrics-Construction-Methods of analysis-Part 5: Determination of linear density of yarn removed from fabric
ISO 7211-6 : 1984, Textiles-Woven fabrics-Construction-Methods of analysis-Part 6: Determination of the mass of warp and weft per unit area o
ISO 7768 : 2009, Textiles-Test method for assessing the smoothness appearance of fabrics after cleansing
ISO 9237 : 1995, Textiles-Determination of the permeability of fabrics to air
ISO 13934-1 : 1999, Textiles-Tensile properties of fabrics-Part 1: Determination of maximum force and elongation at maximum force using the s
ISO 13934-2 : 1999, Textiles-Tensile properties of fabrics-Part 2: Determination of maximum force using the grab method
ISO 13936-1 : 2004, Textiles-Determination of the slippage resistance of yarns at a seam in woven fabrics-Part 1: Fixed seam opening method
ISO 13936-2 : 2004, Textiles−Determination of the slippage resistance of yarns at a seam in woven fabrics−Part 2: Fixed load method
ISO 13936-3 : 2005, Textiles-Determination of the slippage resistance of yarns at a seam in woven fabrics-Part 3: Needle clamp method
ISO 13937-1 : 2000, Textiles-Tear properties of fabrics-Part 1: Determination of tear force using ballistic pendulum method (Elmendorf)
ISO 13938-1 : 1999, Textiles-Bursting properties of fabrics-Part 1: Hydraulic method for determination of bursting strength and bursting distensi
ISO 22198 : 2006, Textiles−Fabrics−Determination of width and length

JIS L 1096 - 2010 Fabric and Knitted Fabric Testing Method

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

JIS L 1096 - 2010 Fabric and Knitted Fabric Testing Method

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

> Go to site top > Go to the list of this category

Terms and definitions

5.1 Testing location Four

5.2 Absolute dry mass Four

5.3 Official moisture content Four

5.4 Temperature and humidity Four

6 Collection and preparation of samples and test pieces Five

7 How to round numbers Five

8 Test method Five

8.1 Organization Five

8.2 Size Five

8.3 Mass per unit area 6

8.7 Yarn shrinkage 8

8.8 Stitch length and cover factor 9

8.9 Composition of used yarn Ten

8.10 Moisture and moisture content 12

8.11 Apparent specific gravity and pore volume ratio 12

8.12 Cloth bend 13

8.13 Dregs and neps 14

8.14 Tensile strength and elongation Fifteen

8.15 Elongation modulus at constant elongation 18

8.16 Stretchability of stretch fabrics and knits 19

8.17 Tear strength 26

8.18 Burst strength 30

8.19 Wear strength and friction discoloration 32

8.20 Compression rate and compression modulus 41

8.22 Bending resilience 46

L 1096： 2010 Table of Contents

8.23 Sliding resistance 50

8.24 Wrinkles after washing 56

8.31 Resin qualification and resin amount 63

8.32 Fats and oils 63

8.33 Solvent extractables 63

8.34 Washing weight loss 63

8.36 Free formaldehyde amount 64

8.38 Barium activity number 64

8.39 Dimensional change 65

Annex A (normative) Textile products-Woven fabrics-Structural analysis-Organizational charts

Annex B (normative) Textile products-Fabrics-Measurement of width and length 82

Annex E (normative) Textile products-Measurement of thickness of fabrics and textile products 95

Annex EB (Reference) References 99

Annex F (normative) Textile products-Textiles-Structure-Analytical methods-Measurement of the number of yarns

Annex G (normative) Textile products-Woven fabrics-Structures-Analytical methods-Measurement of shrinkage

Annex GA (normative) Initial load 110

Annex H (normative) Textile products-Woven fabrics-Structures-Analytical methods-Measurement of apparent111

Annex J2 (Reference) Specimen cut-off locations from test samples 126

Annex J3 (Reference) References 127

Annex KA (normative) Recommended procedure for sampling 133

Annex KB (Reference) Specimen cut-off locations from test samples 134

Annex KC (Reference) Grab arrangement for grab test 135

Annex KD (Reference) References 136

Annex L (normative) Textile products-Tear properties of fabric-Ballistic pendulum method (Elmendorf)

Annex LA (Reference) Adjustment and certification of test equipment 142

Annex LD (Reference) References 145

Annex NA (Reference) Accuracy and accuracy 155

Annex O (normative) Textile products-Measurement of air permeability of fabrics 156

Annex OB (normative) Desirable sampling method 160

Annex P (normative) Textile products- Determination of pH of aqueous extract 161

Annex PA (Reference) Preparation of standard buffer 164

L 1096： 2010 Table of Contents

Japanese Industrial Standard JIS

Fabric testing method for woven and knitted fabrics

Is a Japanese Industrial Standard created by changing